Download User Manual - Indusquip Marketing
Transcript
Goodrive300 inverters Preface Preface Thanks for choosing our products. Goodrive300 series inverters are high performance open loop vector inverters for controlling asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors. Applying the most advanced non-velocity sensor vector control technology which keeps pace with the leading international technology and DSP control system, our products enhances its reliability to meet the adaptability to the environment, customized and industrialized design with more optimized functions, more flexible application and more stable performance. The control performance of Goodrive300 series inverters is as outstanding as that of the leading sophisticated inverters on worldwide market. Goodrive300 series inverters integrate the drive of asynchronous motors and synchronous motors, torque control and speed control, meeting the high performance requirement of the customer applications and stepping on the unique incorporated inverters with superexcellent control functions in this circle. Simultaneously, comparing with the other kinds, Goodrive300 series inverters can adapt to worse grid, temperature, humidity and dust with a better performance of anti-tripping and improved the reliability. Goodrive300 series inverters apply modularized design to meet the specific demand of customers, as well as the demand of the whole industry flexibly and follow the trend of industrial application to the inverters on the premise of meeting general need of the market. Powerful speed control, torque control, simple PLC, flexible input/output terminals, pulse frequency given, traverse control can realize various complicate high-accuracy drives and provide integrative solution for the manufacturers of industrial devices, which contributes a lot to the cost reducing and improves reliability. Goodrive300 series inverters can meet the demand of environmental protection which focuses on low noise and weakening electromagnetic interference in the application sites for the customers. This manual provides installation and configuration, parameters setting, fault diagnoses and daily maintenance and relative precautions to customers. Please read this manual carefully before the installation to ensure a proper installation and operation and high performance of Goodrive300 series inverters. If the product is ultimately used for military affairs or manufacture of weapon, it will be listed on the export control formulated by Foreign Trade Law of the People's Republic of China. Rigorous review and necessary export formalities are needed when exported. Our company reserves the right to update the information of our products. 1 Goodrive300 inverters Content Content Preface .............................................................................................................................. 1 Content .............................................................................................................................. 2 Safety Precautions 1 ..................................................................... 6 1.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................. 6 1.2 Safety definition .................................................................................................. 6 1.3 Warning symbols ................................................................................................ 6 1.4 Safety guidelines ................................................................................................ 7 Quick Start-up 2........................................................11 2.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................11 2.2 Unpacking inspection.........................................................................................11 2.3 Application confirmation .....................................................................................11 2.4 Environment ......................................................................................................12 2.5 Installation confirmation .....................................................................................12 2.6 Basic commission ..............................................................................................13 Product Overview 3 ..................................................................14 3.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................14 3.2 Basic principles..................................................................................................14 3.3 Product specification..........................................................................................15 3.4 Nameplate .........................................................................................................17 3.5 Type designation key .........................................................................................17 3.6 Rated specifications...........................................................................................18 3.7 Structure diagram ..............................................................................................19 Installation Guidelines 4........................................................................22 4.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................22 4.2 Mechanical installation .......................................................................................22 4.3 Standard wiring ..................................................................................................28 4.4 Layout protection ...............................................................................................38 Keypad Operation Procedure 5 ..............................................................................40 5.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................40 5.2 Keypad ..............................................................................................................40 2 Goodrive300 inverters Content 5.3 Keypad displaying..............................................................................................43 5.4 Keypad operation...............................................................................................44 Function Parameters 6.................................................................47 6.1 What this chapter contains .................................................................................47 6.2 Goodrive300 general series function parameters................................................47 Basic Operation Instruction 7 ...................................................................141 7.1 What this chapter contains ...............................................................................141 7.2 First powering on .............................................................................................141 7.3 Vector control...................................................................................................146 7.4 V/F control .......................................................................................................151 7.5 Torque control..................................................................................................157 7.6 Parmeters of the motor ....................................................................................162 7.7 Start-up and stop control ..................................................................................167 7.8 Frequency setting ............................................................................................172 7.9 Analog input.....................................................................................................178 7.10 Analog output.................................................................................................180 7.11 Digital input ....................................................................................................183 7.12 Digital input....................................................................................................192 7.13 Simple PLC....................................................................................................195 7.14 Multi-stage speed running ..............................................................................198 7.15 PID control.....................................................................................................200 7.16 Traverse running............................................................................................204 7.17 Pulse counter.................................................................................................206 7.18 Fixed-length control .......................................................................................208 7.19 Fault procedure..............................................................................................209 Fault tracking 8 ............................................................213 8.1 What this chapter contains ...............................................................................213 8.2 Alarm and fault indications ...............................................................................213 8.3 How to reset ....................................................................................................213 8.4 Fault history .....................................................................................................213 8.5 Fault instruction and solution............................................................................213 3 Goodrive300 inverters Content 8.6 Common fault analysis.....................................................................................219 8.6.1 The motor does not work...............................................................................219 8.6.2 Motor vibration ..............................................................................................220 8.6.3 Overvoltage ..................................................................................................221 8.6.4 Undervoltage fault.........................................................................................221 8.6.5 Abnormal heating of the motor ......................................................................222 8.6.6 Overheat of the inverter ................................................................................223 8.6.7 Speed loss during the acceleration of the motor ............................................223 8.6.8 Overcurrent...................................................................................................224 Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9...............................................................225 9.1 What this chapter contains. ..............................................................................225 9.2 Maintenance intervals ......................................................................................225 9.3 Cooling fan ......................................................................................................229 9.4 Capacitors .......................................................................................................229 9.5 Power cable.....................................................................................................231 Communication protocol 10 .......................................................................232 10.1 What this chapter contains .............................................................................232 10.2 Brief instruction to Modbus protocol ...............................................................232 10.3 Application of the inverter ...............................................................................233 10.4 RTU command code and communication data illustration...............................239 Common communication fault................................................................................252 Extension card Appendix A ...................................................253 A.1 What this chapter contains...............................................................................253 A.2 Profibus extension card ...................................................................................253 Technical data Appendix B ..................................................272 B.1 What this chapter contains...............................................................................272 B.2 Ratings............................................................................................................272 B.3 Electric power network specification ................................................................273 B.4 Motor connection data .....................................................................................274 B.5 Applicable standards .......................................................................................274 B.6 EMC regulations..............................................................................................275 4 Goodrive300 inverters Dimension drawings Content Appendix C ...................................................277 C.1 What this chapter contains ..............................................................................277 C.2 Keypad structure .............................................................................................277 C.3 Inverter chart...................................................................................................278 C.4 Inverter chart...................................................................................................278 Peripherial options and parts Appendix D ....................................................283 D.1 What this chapter contains What this chapter contain ......................................283 D.2 Peripherial wiring.............................................................................................283 D.3 Power supply ..................................................................................................284 D.4 Cables ............................................................................................................285 D.5 Breaker and electromagnetic contactor............................................................288 D.6 Reactors .........................................................................................................290 D.7 Filter ...............................................................................................................291 D.8 Braking system ...............................................................................................294 Further information Appendix E ....................................................298 5 Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions Safety Precautions 1 1.1 What this chapter contains Please read this manual carefully and follow all safety precautions before moving, installing, operating and servicing the inverter. If ignored, physical injury or death may occur, or damage may occur to the devices. If any physical injury or death or damage to the devices occurs for ignoring to the safety precautions in the manual, our company will not be responsible for any damages and we are not legally bound in any manner. 1.2 Safety definition Danger: Serious physical injury or even death may occur if not follow relevent requirements Warning: Physical injury or damage to the devices may occur if not follow relevent requirements Note: Physical hurt may occur if not follow relevent requirements Qualified People working on the device should take part in professional electricians: electrical and safety training, receive the certification and be familiar with all steps and requirements of installing, commissioning, operating and maintaining the device to avoid any emergency. 1.3 Warning symbols Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death and/or damage to the equipment, and advice on how to avoid the danger. Following warning symbols are used in this manual: Symbols Name Electrical Danger Danger Serious physical injury or even death may occur if not follow the relative requirements General Warning Instruction danger Physical injury or damage to the devices may occur if not follow the relative requirements 6 Abbreviation Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions Symbols Name Electrostatic Do not discharge Instruction Abbreviation Damage to the PCBA board may occur if not follow the relative requirements Sides of the device may become Hot sides Hot sides Note Note hot. Do not touch. Physical hurt may occur if not follow Note the relative requirements 1.4 Safety guidelines Only qualified electricians are allowed to operate on the inverter. Do not carry out any wiring and inspection or changing components when the power supply is applied. Ensure all input power supply is disconnected before wiring and checking and always wait for at least the time designated on the inverter or until the DC bus voltage is less than 36V. Below is the table of the waiting time: Inverter module Minimum waiting time 400V 1.5kW-110kW 5 minutes 400V 132 kW -315 kW 15 minutes 400V above 350 kW 25 minutes Do not refit the inverter unauthorizedly; otherwise fire, electric shock or other injury may occur. The base of the radiator may become hot during running. Do not touch to avoid hurt. The electrical parts and components inside the inverter are electrostatic. Take measurements to avoid electrostatic discharge during relevent operation. 1.4.1 Delivery and installation Please install the inverter on fire-retardant material and keep the inverter away from combustible materials. Connect the braking optional parts (braking resistors, braking units or feedback units) according to the wiring diagram. Do not operate on the inverter if there is any damage or components loss to 7 Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions the inverter. Do not touch the inverter with wet items or body, otherwise electric shock may occur. Note: Select appropriate moving and installing tools to ensure a safe and normal running of the inverter and avoid physical injury or death. For physical safety, the erector should take some mechanical protective measurements, such as wearing exposure shoes and working uniforms. Ensure to avoid physical shock or vibration during delivery and installation. Do not carry the inverter by its cover. The cover may fall off. Install away from children and other public places. The inverter cannot meet the requirements of low voltage protection in IEC61800-5-1 if the sea level of installation site is above 2000m. Please use the inverter on appropriate condition (See chapter Installation Environment). Don't allow screws, cables and other conductive items to fall inside the inverter. The leakage current of the inverter may be above 3.5mA during operation. HIGH LEAKAGE CURRENT, EARTH CONNECTION ESSENTIAL BEFORE CONNECTING SUPPLY. Ground with proper techniques and ensure the grounding resistor is less than 10Ω. The conductivity of PE grounding conductor is the same as that of the phase conductor (with the same cross sectional area). Grounding conductors minimum cross-sectional area of at least 10mm 2, or the corresponding data in the table below, the maximum being asked to choose between the two cross-sectional area as the grounding conductor: Power line conductor cross-sectional area Grounding conductor cross-sectional area mm 2 mm 2 S≤16 S 16<S≤35 16 35<S S/2 R, S and T are the input terminals of the power supply, while U, V and W are the motor terminals. Please connect the input power cables and motor cables with proper techniques; otherwise the damage to the inverter may occur. 8 Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions 1.4.2 Commission and running Disconnect all power supplies applied to the inverter before the terminal wiring and wait for at least the designated time after disconnecting the power supply. High voltage is present inside the inverter during running. Do not carry out any operation except for the keypad setting. The inverter may start up by itself when P01.21=1. Do not get close to the inverter and motor. The inverter can not be used as “Emergency-stop device”. The inverter can not be used to break the motor suddenly. A mechanical braking device should be provided. Besides the above items, check to ensure the following ones before the installation and maintenance during the running of the permanent synchronization motor: 1. All input power supply is disconnected (including the main power supply and the control power supply). 2. The permanent magnet synchronization motor has stopped running and measured to ensure the output voltage of the inverter is less than 36V. 3. The waiting time of the permanent magnet synchronization motor after stopping is no less than the time designated and measure to ensure the voltage between + and – is less than 36V. 4. Ensure the permanent magnet synchronization motor does not rotate again because of the external load. It is recommended to install effectively external braking devices or disconnect the electric wiring between the motor and the inverter directly. Note: Do not switch on or off the input power supply of the inverter frequently. For inverters that have been stored for a long time, check and fix the capacitance and try to run it again before utilization (see Maintenance and Hardware Fault Diagnose). Cover the front board before running, otherwise electric shock may occur. 9 Goodrive300 inverters Safety precautions 1.4.3 Maintenance and replacement of components Only qualified electricians are allowed to perform the maintenance, inspection, and components replacement of the inverter. Disconnect all power supplies to the inverter before the terminal wiring. Wait for at least the time designated on the inverter after disconnection. Take measures to avoid screws, cables and other conductive matters to fall into the inverter during maintenance and component replacement. Note: Please select proper torque to tighten screws. Keep the inverter, parts and components away from combustible materials during maintenance and component replacement. Do not carry out any isolation and pressure test on the inverter and do not measure the control circuit of the inverter by megameter. Carry out a sound anti-electrostatic protection to the inverter and its internal components during maintenance and component replacement. 1.4.4 What to do after scrapping There are heavy metals in the inverter. Deal with it as industrial effluent. 10 Goodrive300 inverters Quick start-up Quick Start-up 2 2.1 What this chapter contains This chapter mainly describes the basic guidelines during the installation and commission procedures on the inverter, which you may follow to install and commission the inverter quickly. 2.2 Unpacking inspection Check as followings after receiving products: 1. Check that there are no damage and humidification to the package. If not, please contact with local agents or INVT offices. 2. Check the information on the type designation label on the outside of the package to verify that the drive is of the correct type. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices. 3. Check that there are no signs of water in the package and no signs of damage or breach to the inverter. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices. 4. Check the information on the type designation label on the outside of the package to verify that the name plate is of the correct type. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices. 5. Check to ensure the accessories (including user’s manual, control keypad and extension card) inside the device is complete. If not, please contact with local dealers or INVT offices. 2.3 Application confirmation Check the machine before beginning to use the inverter: 1. Check the load type to verify that there is no overload of the inverter during work and check that whether the drive needs to modify the power degree. 2. Check that the actual current of the motor is less than the rated current of the inverter. 3. Check that the control accuracy of the load is the same of the inverter. 4. Check that the incoming supply voltage is correspondent to the rated voltage of the inverter. 5. Check that the communication needs option card or not. 11 Goodrive300 inverters Quick start-up 2.4 Environment Check as followings before the actual installation and usage: 1. Check that the ambient temperature of the inverter is below 40℃ . If exceeds, derate 3% for every additional 1℃ . Additionally, the inverter can not be used if the ambient temperature is above 50℃. Note: for the cabinet inverter, the ambient temperature means the air temperature inside the cabinet. 2. Check that the ambient temperature of the inverter in actual usage is above -10℃. If not, add heating facilities. Note: for the cabinet inverter, the ambient temperature means the air temperature inside the cabinet. 3. Check that the altitude of the actual usage site is below 1000m. If exceeds, derate1% for every additional 100m. 4. Check that the humidity of the actual usage site is below 90% and condensation is not allowed. If not, add additional protection inverters. 5. Check that the actual usage site is away from direct sunlight and foreign objects can not enter the inverter. If not, add additional protective measures. 6. Check that there is no conductive dust or flammable gas in the actual usage site. If not, add additional protection to inverters. 2.5 Installation confirmation Check as followings after the installation: 1. Check that the load range of the input and output cables meet the need of actual load. 2. Check that the accessories of the inverter are correctly and properly installed. The installation cables should meet the needs of every component (including reactors, input filters, output reactors, output filters, DC reactors, braking units and braking resistors). 3. Check that the inverter is installed on non-flammable materials and the calorific accessories (reactors and brake resistors) are away from flammable materials. 4. Check that all control cables and power cables are run separately and the routation complies with EMC requirement. 5. Check that all grounding systems are properly grounded according to the requirements of the inverter. 6. Check that the free space during installation is sufficient according to the instructions in user’s manual. 12 Goodrive300 inverters Quick start-up 7. Check that the installation conforms to the instructions in user’s manual. The drive must be installed in an upright position. 8. Check that the external connection terminals are tightly fastened and the torque is appropriate. 9. Check that there are no screws, cables and other conductive items left in the inverter. If not, get them out. 2.6 Basic commission Complete the basic commissioning as followings before actual utilization: 1. Select the motor type, set correct motor parameters and select control mode of the inverter according to the actual motor parameters. 2. Autotune. If possible, de-coupled from the motor load to start dynamic autotune. Or if not, static autotune is available. 3. Adjust the ACC/DEC time according to the actual running of the load. 4. Commission the device via jogging and check that the rotation direction is as required. If not, change the rotation direction by changing the wiring of motor. 5. Set all control parameters and then operate. 13 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview Product Overview 3 3.1 What this chapter contains The chapter briefly describes the operation principle, product characteristics, layout, name plate and type designation information. 3.2 Basic principles Goodrive300 series inverters are wall or flange mountable devices for controlling asynchronous AC induction motors and permanent magnet synchronous motors. The diagram below shows the simplified main circuit diagram of the inverter. The rectifier converts three-phase AC voltage to DC voltage. The capacitor bank of the intermediate circuit stabilizes the DC voltage. The converter transforms the DC voltage back to AC voltage for the AC motor. The brake pipe connects the external braking resistor to the intermediate DC circuit to consume the feedback energy when the voltage in the circuit exceeds its maximum limit. Diagram 3-1 The simplified main circuit diagram (above 37kW (including 37kW)) Diagram 3-2 The simplified main circuit diagram (below 30kW (including 30kW)) 14 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview Note: 1. The inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) supports external DC reactor which is an optional part. Before connecting, it is necessary to remove the copper row between P1 and(+). 2. The inverter below 30kW (including 30kW) supports external braking resistor; the inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) supports external braking units. Both the braking unit and the braking resistor are optional parts. 3.3 Product specification Function Specification AC 3PH 400V±15% Input voltage (V) Power input AC 3PH 660V±10% Input current (A) Input frequency (Hz) Power output 50Hz or 60Hz Allowed range: 47~63Hz 0~input voltage Output current (A) Refer to the rated value Output power (kW) Refer to the rated value (Hz) Control mode control feature Refer to the rated value Output voltage (V) Output frequency Technical AC 3PH 220V±10% Motor type Adjustable-speed ratio Speed control 0~400Hz V/F, sensorless vector control Asynchronous motor and permanent magnet synchronous motor Asynchronous motor 1:200 (SVC) synchronous motor 1:20 (SVC) ±0.2% (sensorless vector control) accuracy Speed fluctuation ± 0.3%(sensorless vector control) Torque response <20ms(sensorless vector control) Torque control accuracy Starting torque 10%(sensorless vector control) Asynchronous motor: 0.25Hz/150%(sensorless vector15 control) Goodrive300 inverters Product overview Function Specification Synchronous motor: 2.5 Hz/150%(sensorless vector control) 150% of rated current: 1 minute Overload capability 180% of rated current: 10 seconds 200% of rated current: 1 second Digital setting, analog setting, pulse frequency setting, multi-stage speed running setting, simple Frequency setting method PLC setting, PID setting, MODBUS communication setting, PROFIBUS communication setting. Realize the shifting between the set combination and set channel. Running control Auto-adjustment of feature the voltage Keep a stable voltage automatically when the grid voltage transients Provide Fault protection over 30 fault protection functions: overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage, overheating, phase loss and overload, etc. Restart after rotating Realize the smooth starting of the rotating motor speed tracking Peripheral Terminal analog input interface resolution Terminal switch input resolution Analog input Analog output Not above 20mV Not above 2ms 2 ways (AI1, AI2) 0~10V/0~20mA and 1 way (AI3) -10~10V 2 ways (AO1, AO2) 0~10V /0~20mA 8 ways common input, the Max. frequency: 1kHz, Digital input internal impedance: 3.3kΩ; 1 way high speed input, the Max. frequency: 50kHz 1way high speed pulse output, the Max. frequency: Digital output 50kHz; 1way Y terminal open collector pole output 16 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview Function Specification 2 ways programmable relay output Relay output RO1A NO, RO1B NC, RO1C common terminal RO2A NO, RO2B NC, RO2C common terminal Contactor capability: 3A/AC250V,1A/DC30V Mountable method Temperature of the Wall, flange and floor mountable -10~50℃, derate above 40℃ running environment Average non-fault 2 years (25℃ ambient temperature) time Protective degree Cooling Others IP20 Air-cooling Built in braking unit for below 30kW (including Braking unit 30kW) External braking unit for others Built-in C3 filter: meet the degree requirement of EMC filter IEC61800-3 C3 External filter:meet the degree requirement of IEC61800-3 C2 3.4 Nameplate Fig 3-3 Name plate 3.5 Type designation key The type designation contains information on the inverter. The user can find the type designation on the type designation label attached to the inverter or the simple name plate. 17 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview GD300 – 5R5G – 4 – 2 T * * ① ② ③ ④ ⑤ ⑥ Fig 3-4 Product type Field Detailed Sign identification Abbreviation Detailed content description of the sign ① Product Goodrive300 is shorted for GD300. abbreviation Rated power Voltage degree ② ③ Power range + 5R5-5.5kW Load type G—Constant torque load Voltage degree 400V 3.6 Rated specifications Constant torque The inverter Rated Rated Weight(Kg) Rated Weight(Kg) output input output power (A) current (A) current (A) GD300-1R5G-4 1.5 5.0 3.7 1.5 GD300-2R2G-4 2.2 5.8 5 2.2 GD300-004G-4 4 13.5 9.5 4 GD300-5R5G-4 5.5 19.5 14 5.5 GD300-7R5G-4 7.5 25 18.5 7.5 GD300-011G-4 11 32 25 11 GD300-015G/-4 15 40 32 15 GD300-018G-4 18.5 47 38 18.5 GD300-022G-4 22 56 45 22 GD300-030G-4 30 70 60 30 GD300-037G-4 37 80 75 37 GD300-045G-4 45 94 92 45 GD300-055G-4 55 128 115 55 GD300-075G-4 75 160 150 75 18 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview Constant torque The inverter Rated Rated Weight(Kg) Rated Weight(Kg) output input output power (A) current (A) current (A) GD300-090G-4 90 190 180 90 GD300-110G-4 110 225 215 110 GD300-132G-4 132 265 260 132 GD300-160G-4 160 310 305 160 GD300-200G-4 200 385 380 200 GD300-220G-4 220 430 425 220 GD300-250G-4 250 485 480 250 GD300-280G-4 280 545 530 280 GD300-315G-4 315 610 600 315 GD300-350G-4 350 625 650 350 GD300-400G-4 400 715 720 400 GD300-500G-4 500 890 860 500 Note: 1. The input current of 1.5~315kW inverters is measured when the input voltage is 380V and configured without DC reactor and input/output filter. 2. The input current of 350~500kW inverters is measured when the input voltage is 380V and configured with input reactor. 3. The output current is defined as the output current when the output voltage is 380V. Note: the inverter is configured LED keypad. The LCD keypad is optional with various functions. The installation is compatible with that of the LED keypad. Note: M3 nuts and the bracket can be used directly in the installation. The keypad bracket is optional for 1.5~30kW inverters and configured for 37~500kW inverters. 3.7 Structure diagram Below is the layout figure of the inverter (take the inverter of 30kW as the example). 19 Goodrive300 inverters Product overview 4 5 6 1 7 8 9 2 11 3 10 12 13 14 Fig 3-5 Product structure diagram Serial Name Illustration No. 1 Keypad connections 2 Upper cover 3 Keypad 4 Cooling fan 5 Cardboard Connect the keypad Protect the internal parts and components See Keypad Operation Procedure for detailed information See Maintenance and Hardware Fault Diagnose for detailed information The cardboard, with installation holes, is the same as the behind cover of the machine and, so it is convenient for the installation. 6 Wire arrangement Connect to the control board and the drive board interface 7 Name plate See Product Overview for detailed information Optional part. The side cover will increase the 8 Side cover protective degree of the inverter. The internal temperature of the inverter will increase, too, so it is necessary to derate the inverter at the same time 20 Goodrive300 inverters Serial Product overview Name Illustration No. 9 Control terminals See Electric Installation for detailed information 10 Main circuit terminals See Electric Installation for detailed information 11 Main circuit cable entry 12 POWER light 13 Simple name plate 14 Lower cover Fix the main circuit cable Power indicator See Product Overview for detailed information Protect the internal parts and components 21 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Installation Guidelines 4 4.1 What this chapter contains The chapter describes the mechanical installation and electric installation. Only qualified electricians are allowed to carry out what described in this chapter. Please operate as the instructions in Safety Precautions. Ignoring these may cause physical injury or death or damage to the devices. Ensure the power supply of the inverter is disconnected during the operation. Wait for at least the time designated until the POWER indicator is off after the disconnection if the power supply is applied. It is recommended to use the multimeter to monitor that the DC bus voltage of the drive is under 36V. The installation and design of the inverter should be complied with the requirement of the local laws and regulations in the installation site. If the installation infringes the requirement, our company will exempt from any responsibility. Additionally, if users do not comply with the suggestion, some damage beyond the assured maintenance range may occur. 4.2 Mechanical installation 4.2.1 Installation environment The installation environment is the safeguard for a full performance and long-term stable functions of the inverter. Check the installation environment as followings: Environment Installation site Conditions Indoor -10~+50℃ If the ambient temperature of the inverter is above 40℃ , derate 3% for every additional 1℃ . Environment temperature It is not recommended to use the inverter if the ambient temperature is above 50℃ . In order to improve the reliability of the device, do not use the inverter if the ambient temperature changes frequently. Please provide cooling fan or air conditioner to control the internal ambient temperature below the required one if the inverter is used 22 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Environment Conditions in a close space such as in the control cabinet. When the temperature is too low, if the inverter needs to restart to run after a long stop, it is necessary to provide an external heating device to increase the internal temperature, otherwise damage to the devices may occur. RH≤90% Humidity No condensation is allowed. The maximum relative humility should be equal to or less than 60% in corrosive air. Storage temperature -30~+60℃ The installation site of the inverter should: keep away from the electromagnetic radiation source; keep away from contaminative air, such as corrosive gas, oil mist Running and flammable gas; environment ensure foreign objects, such as metal power, dust, oil, water can condition not enter into the inverter(do not install the inverter on the flammable materials such as wood); keep away from direct sunlight, oil mist, steam and vibration environment. Below 1000m Altitude If the sea level is above 1000m, please derate 1% for every additional 100m. Vibration Installation direction ≤ 5.88m/s2(0.6g) The inverter should be installed on an upright position to ensure sufficient cooling effect. Note: Goodrive300 series inverters should be installed in a clean and ventilated environment according to enclosure classification. Cooling air must be clean, free from corrosive materials and electrically conductive dust. 23 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.2.2 Installation direction The inverter may be installed on the wall or in a cabinet. The inverter must be installed in an upright position. Check the installation site according to the requirements below. Refer to chapter Dimension Drawings in the appendix for frame details. Fig 4-1 Installation direction of the inverter 4.2.3 Installation manner The inverter can be installed in three different ways, depending on the frame size: a) Wall mounting (≤315kW) b) Flange mounting (≤200kW) c) Floor mounting (220kW-500k) Fig 4-2 Installation manner (1)Mark the hole location. The location of the holes is shown in the dimension drawings in the appendix. (2)Fix the screws or bolts to the marked locations.. (3)Position the drive onto the wall. (4)Tighten the screws in the wall securely. 24 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Note: the flange installation of 1.5~30kW inverters need flange board, while the flange installation of 37~200kW inverters do not need. 4.2.4 Single installation Fig 4-3 Single installation Note:The minimum space of B and C is 100mm. 4.2.5 Multiple installations Parallel installation Fig 4-4 Parallel installation Note: Before installing the different sizes inverters,please align their top position for the convenience of later maintenance. The minimum space of B, D and C is 100mm. 25 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.2.6 Vertical installation Fig 4-5 Vertical installation Note: Windscreen should be added in Vertical installation for avoiding mutual impact and insufficient cooling. 26 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.2.7 Tilt installation Fig 4-6 Tilt installation Note: Ensure the separation of the wind input and output channels in tilt installation for avoiding mutual impact. 27 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.3 Standard wiring 4.3.1 Connection diagram of main circuit Diagram 4-7 Connection diagram of main circuit Note: The fuse, DC reactor, braking unit, braking resistor, input reactor, input filter, output reactor, output filter are optional parts. Please refer to Peripheral Optional Parts for detailed information. A1 and A2 are optional parts. P1 and (+) are short circuited in factory, if need to connect with the DC rector, please remove the contact tag between P1 and (+). 28 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.3.2 Terminals figure of main circuit Fig 4-8 1.5~2.2 kW terminals of main circuit Fig 4-9 4~5.5 kW terminals of main circuit Fig 4-10 7.5~11kW terminals of main circuit 29 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Fig 4-11 15~18kW terminals of main circuit Fig 4-12 22~30kW terminals of main circuit Fig 4-13 37~55 kW terminals of main circuit 30 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Fig 4-14 75~110kW terminals of main circuit Fig 4-15 132~315kW terminals of main circuit Terminal name Terminal Below 30kW sign (including 30 Function Above 37kW(including 37 kW) kW) R S 3-phase AC input terminals Power input of the main circuit which are generally connected with the power T U supply. The inverter output 31 3-phase AC output terminals Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Terminal name Terminal Below 30kW sign (including 30 Function Above 37kW(including 37 kW) kW) V which W connected with the motor. This terminal is P1 inexistent DC reactor terminal 1 are generally P1 and (+) are connected with the terminals of DC Braking resistor DC reactor terminal 2, braking unit reactor. (+) 1 (-) / terminal 1 (+) and (-) are connected Braking unit terminal 2 with the terminals of braking unit. PB and (+) are connected Braking PB This terminal is inexistent. resistor 2 with the terminals of braking resistor. Protective grounding terminals, every machine is provided 2 PE terminals as PE 400V:the grounding resistor is less than 10Ohm the standard configuration. These terminals should be grounded with proper techniques. Optional parts (external A1 and A2 Control power supply terminal 220V control power supply) Note: Do not use an asymmetrically constructed motor cable. If there is a symmetrically constructed grounding conductor in the motor cable in addition to the conductive shield, connect the grounding conductor to the grounding terminal at the inverter and motor ends. Braking resistor, braking unit and DC reactor are optional parts. Route the motor cable, input power cable and control cables separately. If the terminal is not appeared, the machine does not provide the terminal as the 32 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines external terminal. 4.3.3 Wiring of terminals in main circuit 1. Fasten the grounding conductor of the input power cable with the grounding terminal of the inverter (PE) by 360 degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to R, S and T terminals and fasten. 2. Strip the motor cable and connect the shield to the grounding terminal of the inverter by 360 degree grounding technique. Connect the phase conductors to U, V and W terminals and fasten. 3. Connect the optional brake resistor with a shielded cable to the designated position by the same procedures in the previous step. 4. Secure the cables outside the inverter mechanically. Fig 4-14 Correct installation of the screw Fig 4-15 360 degree grounding technique 33 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 4.3.4 Wiring diagram of control circuit Fig 4-18 Wiring of control circuit 4.3.5 Terminals of control circuit Fig 4-17 Terminals of control circuit 34 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Terminal Description name +10V AI1 AI2 Local power supply +10V 1. Input range: AI1/AI2 voltage and current can be chose: 0~10V/0~20mA;AI1 can be shifted by J1; AI2 can be shifted by J2 AI3:-10V~+10V 2. Input impedance:voltage input: 20kΩ; current input: 500Ω AI3 3. Resolution: the minimum one is 5mV when 10V corresponds to 50Hz 4. Deviation ±1%, 25℃ GND +10V reference null potential AO1 1. Output range:0~10V or -20~20mA 2. The voltage or the current output is depended on the jumper AO2 3. Deviation±1%,25℃ Terminal Description name RO1A RO1 relay output, RO1A NO, RO1B NC, RO1C common terminal RO1B Contactor capability: 3A/AC250V,1A/DC30V RO1C RO2A RO2 relay output, RO2A NO, RO2B NC, RO2C common terminal RO2B Contactor capability: 3A/AC250V,1A/DC30V RO2C 35 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Terminal Description name PE Grounding terminal Provide the input switch working power supply from external to PW internal. Voltage range: 12~24V 24V COM The inverter provides the power supply for users with a maximum output current of 200mA +24V common terminal S1 Switch input 1 S2 Switch input 2 S3 Switch input 3 S4 Switch input 4 terminal supporting both NPN and PNP S5 Switch input 5 4. Max input frequency:1kHz S6 Switch input 6 S7 Switch input 7 S8 Switch input 8 1. Internal impedance:3.3kΩ 2. 12~30V voltage input is available 3. The terminal is the dual-direction input 5. All are programmable digital input terminal. User can set the terminal function through function codes. Except for S1~S8, this terminal can be used as high frequency HDI input channel. Max. input frequency:50kHz Terminal Description name 24V HDO The inverter provides the power supply for users with a maximum output current of 200mA 1. Switch input:200mA/30V 2. Output frequency range:0~50kHz COM +24V common terminal CME Common terminal of the open collector pole output Y 1.Swtich capability:200mA/30V 2.Output frequency range:0~1kHz 36 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines 485+ 485 communication interface and 485 differential signal interface If it is the standard 485 communication interface, please use 485- twisted pairs or shield cable. 4.3.6 Input /Output signal connection figure Please use U-shaped contact tag to set NPN mode or PNP mode and the internal or external power supply. The default setting is NPN internal mode. Fig 4-18 U-shaped contact tag If the signal is from NPN transistor, please set the U-shaped contact tag between +24V and PW as below according to the used power supply. Diagram 4-19 NPN modes If the signal is from PNP transistor, please set the U-shaped contact tag as below according to the used power supply. 37 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines Diagram 4-20 PNP modes 4.4 Layout protection 4.4.1 Protecting the inverter and input power cable in short-circuit situations Protect the inverter and input power cable in short circuit situations and against thermal overload. Arrange the protection according to the following guidelines. Fig 4-16 Fuse configuration Note: Select the fuse as the manual indicated. The fuse will protect the input power cable from damage in short-circuit situations. It will protect the surrounding devices when the internal of the inverter is short circuited. 4.4.2 Protecting the motor and motor cable in short-circuit situations The inverter protects the motor and motor cable in a short-circuit situation when the motor cable is dimensioned according to the rated current of the inverter. No additional protection devices are needed. If the inverter is connected to multiple motors, a separate thermal overload switch or a circuit breaker must be used for protecting each cable and motor. These devices may require a separate fuse to cut off 38 Goodrive300 inverters Installation guidelines the short-circuit current. 4.4.3 Protecting the motor against thermal overload According to regulations, the motor must be protected against thermal overload and the current must be switched off when overload is detected. The inverter includes a motor thermal protection function that protects the motor and closes the output to switch off the current when necessary. 4.4.4 Implementing a bypass connection It is necessary to set power frequency and variable frequency conversion circuits for the assurance of continuous normal work of the inverter if faults occur in some significant situations. In some special situations, for example, if it is only used in soft start, the inverter can be conversed into power frequency running after starting and some corresponding bypass should be added. Never connect the supply power to the inverter output terminals U, V and W. Power line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the inverter. If frequent shifting is required, employ mechanically connected switches or contactors to ensure that the motor terminals are not connected to the AC power line and inverter output terminals simultaneously. 39 Goodrive300 inverters Keypad operation procedure Keypad Operation Procedure 5 5.1 What this chapter contains This chapter contains following operation: • Buttons, indicating lights and the screen as well as the methods to inspect, modify and set function codes by keypad • Start-up 5.2 Keypad The keypad is used to control Goodrive300 series inverters, read the state data and adjust parameters. Fig 5-1 Keypad Seri Name Description al No. LED off means that the inverter is in the stopping state; LED blinking means the 1 State LED inverter is in the parameter autotune RUN/TUNE state; LED on means the inverter is in the running state. FED/REV LED LED off means the inverter is in the FWD/REV forward rotation state; LED on means 40 Goodrive300 inverters Seri Keypad operation procedure Name Description al No. the inverter is in the reverse rotation state LED for keypad operation, terminals operation and remote communication control LED off means that the inverter is in the LOCAL/REMOT keypad operation state; LED blinking means the inverter is in the terminals operation state; LED on means the inverter is in the remote communication control state. LED for faults LED on when the inverter is in the fault TRIP state; LED off in normal state; LED blinking means the inverter is in the pre-alarm state. Mean the unit displayed currently 2 Hz Frequency unit A Current unit V Voltage unit RPM Rotating speed unit % Percentage Unit LED 5-figure LED display displays various monitoring data and alarm code such as set frequency and output frequency. Display Code 3 displaying zone ed word Correspon ding word Display ed word Correspon ding word Display ed word Correspon ding word 0 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 6 41 Goodrive300 inverters Seri Keypad operation procedure Name Description al No. 9 A B C d E F H I L N n o P r S t U v . - Digital 4 potentiom Tuning frequency. Please refer to P08.41. eter Enter or escape from the first level 5 Buttons Programming key menu and remove the parameter quickly Entry key Enter the menu step-by-step Confirm parameters UP key DOWN key Increase data or function code progressively Decrease data or function code progressively Move right to select the displaying parameter circularly in stopping and Right-shift key running mode. Select the parameter modifying digit during the parameter modification Run key This key is used to operate on the inverter in key operation mode Stop/ This key is used to stop in running state Reset key and it is limited by function code P07.04 42 This key is used to reset all control Goodrive300 inverters Seri Keypad operation procedure Name Description al No. modes in the fault alarm state Quick key The function of this key is confirmed by function code P07.02. 5.3 Keypad displaying The keypad displaying state of Goodrive300 series inverters is divided into stopping state parameter, running state parameter, function code parameter editing state and fault alarm state and so on. 5.3.1 Displayed state of stopping parameter When the inverter is in the stopping state, the keypad will display stopping parameters which is shown in figure 5-2. In the stopping state, various kinds of parameters can be displayed. Select the parameters to be displayed or not by P07.07. See the instructions of P07.07 for the detailed definition of each bit. In the stopping state, there are 14 stopping parameters can be selected to be displayed or not. They are: set frequency, bus voltage, input terminals state, output terminals state, PID given value, PID feedback value, torque set value, AI1, AI2, AI3, HDI, PLC and the current stage of multi-stage speeds, pulse counting value, length value. P07.07 can select the parameter to be displayed or not by bit and》/SHIFT can shift the parameters form left to right, QUICK/JOG(P07.02=2) can shift the parameters form right to left. 5.3.2 Displayed state of running parameters After the inverter receives valid running commands, the inverter will enter into the running state and the keypad will display the running parameters. RUN/TUNE LED on the keypad is on, while the FWD/REV is determined by the current running direction which is shown as figure 5-2. In the running state, there are 24 parameters can be selected to be displayed or not. They are: running frequency, set frequency, bus voltage, output voltage, output torque, PID given value, PID feedback value, input terminals state, output terminals state, torque set value, length value, PLC and the current stage of multi-stage speeds, pulse counting value, AI1, AI2, AI3, HDI, percentage of motor overload, percentage of inverter overload, ramp given 43 Goodrive300 inverters Keypad operation procedure value, linear speed, AC input current. P07.05 and P07.06 can select the parameter to be displayed or not by bit and 》 /SHIFT can shift the parameters form left to right, QUICK/JOG(P07.02=2) can shift the parameters from right to left. 5.3.3 Displayed state of fault If the inverter detects the fault signal, it will enter into the fault pre-alarm displaying state. The keypad will display the fault code by flicking. The TRIP LED on the keypad is on, and the fault reset can be operated by theSTOP/RST on the keypad, control terminals or communication commands. 5.3.4 Displayed state of function codes editing In the state of stopping, running or fault, press PRG/ESC to enter into the editing state (if there is a password, see P07.00 ).The editing state is displayed on two classes of menu, and the order is: function code group/function code number→function code parameter, press DATA/ENT into the displayed state of function parameter. On this state, you can press DATA/ENT to save the parameters or press PRG/ESC to retreat. Fig 5-2 Displayed state 5.4 Keypad operation Operate the inverter via operation panel. See the detailed structure description of function codes in the brief diagram of function codes. 5.4.1 How to modify the function codes of the inverter The inverter has three levels menu, which are: 1. Group number of function code (first-level menu) 2. Tab of function code (second-level menu) 3. Set value of function code (third-level menu) 44 Goodrive300 inverters Keypad operation procedure Remarks: Press both the PRG/ESC and the DATA/ENT can return to the second-level menu from the third-level menu. The difference is: pressing DATA/ENT will save the set parameters into the control panel, and then return to the second-level menu with shifting to the next function code automatically; while pressing PRG/ESC will directly return to the second-level menu without saving the parameters, and keep staying at the current function code. Under the third-level menu, if the parameter has no flickering bit, it means the function code cannot be modified. The possible reasons could be: 1) This function code is not modifiable parameter, such as actual detected parameter, operation records and so on; 2) This function code is not modifiable in running state, but modifiable in stop state. Example:Set function code P00.01 from 0 to 1. Fig 5-2 Sketch map of modifying parameters 5.4.2 How to set the password of the inverter Goodrive300 series inverters provide password protection function to users. Set P7.00 to gain the password and the password protection becomes valid instantly after quitting from the function code editing state. Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state, “0.0.0.0.0” will be displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot enter it. Set P7.00 to 0 to cancel password protection function. The password protection becomes effective instantly after retreating form the function code editing state. Press PRG/ESC again to the function code editing state, “0.0.0.0.0” will be 45 Goodrive300 inverters Keypad operation procedure displayed. Unless using the correct password, the operators cannot enter it. Fig 5-3 Sketch map of password setting 5.4.3 How to watch the inverter state through function codes Goodrive300 series inverters provide group P17 as the state inspection group. Users can enter into P17 directly to watch the state. Fig 5-4 Sketch map of state watching 46 Goodrive300 inverters Function codes Function Parameters 6 6.1 What this chapter contains This chapter lists and describes the function parameters. 6.2 Goodrive300 general series function parameters The function parameters of Goodrive300 series inverters have been divided into 30 groups (P00~P29) according to the function, of which P18~P28 are reserved. Each function group contains certain function codes applying 3-level menus. For example, “P08.08” means the eighth function code in the P8 group function, P29 group is factory reserved, and users are forbidden to access these parameters. For the convenience of function codes setting, the function group number corresponds to the first level menu, the function code corresponds to the second level menu and the function code corresponds to the third level menu. 1. Below is the instruction of the function lists: The first line “Function code”:codes of function parameter group and parameters; The second line “Name”:full name of function parameters; The third line “Detailed illustration of parameters”:Detailed illustration of the function parameters The fourth line “Default value”:the original factory set value of the function parameter; The fifth line “Modify”:the modifying character of function codes (the parameters can be modified or not and the modifying conditions),below is the instruction: “○”: means the set value of the parameter can be modified on stop and running state; “◎”: means the set value of the parameter can not be modified on the running state; “●”: means the value of the parameter is the real detection value which can not be modified. (The inverter has limited the automatic inspection of the modifying character of the parameters to help users avoid mismodifying) 2. “Parameter radix” is decimal (DEC), if the parameter is expressed by hex, then the parameter is separated from each other when editing. The setting range of certain bits are 0~F (hex). 3.”The default value” means the function parameter will restore to the default value during default parameters restoring. But the detected parameter or recorded value won’t be 47 Goodrive300 inverters Function codes restored. 4. For a better parameter protection, the inverter provides password protection to the parameters. After setting the password (set P07.00 to any non-zero number), the system will come into the state of password verification firstly after the user press PRG/ESC to come into the function code editing state. And then “0.0.0.0.0.” will be displayed. Unless the user input right password, they cannot enter into the system. For the factory setting parameter zone, it needs correct factory password (remind that the users can not modify the factory parameters by themselves, otherwise, if the parameter setting is incorrect, damage to the inverter may occur). If the password protection is unlocked, the user can modify the password freely and the inverter will work as the last setting one. When P07.00 is set to 0, the password can be canceled. If P07.00 is not 0 during powering on, then the parameter is protected by the password. When modify the parameters by serial communication, the function of the password follows the above rules, too. Functio Name n code P00 Group Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y Basic function group 0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying to AM,SM) 0 is suitable in most cases, and in principle, one inverter can only drive one motor in the vector control mode. 1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 (applying to AM) P00.00 Speed 1 is suitable in high performance cases with the control mode advantage of high accuracy of rotating speed and 1 ◎ torque. It does not need to install pulse encoder. 2:V/F control (applying to AM,SM) 2 is suitable in cases where it does not need high control accuracy, such as the load of fan and pump. One inverter can drive multiple motors. Note: AM-Asynchronous motor SM- synchronous motor Run P00.01 Select the run command channel of the inverter. command The control command of the inverter includes: channel start-up, stop, forward, reverse, jogging and fault 48 0 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ reset. 0:Keypad running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” light off) Carry out the command control by RUN, STOP/RST on the keypad. Set the multi-function key QUICK/JOG to FWD/REVC shifting function (P07.02=3) to change the running direction; press RUN and STOP/RST simultaneously in running state to make the inverter coast to stop. 1:Terminal running command channel (“LOCAL/REMOT” flickering) Carry out the running command control by the forward rotation, reverse rotation and forward jogging and reverse jogging of the multi-function terminals 2:Communication running command channel (“LOCAL/REMOT” on); The running command is controlled by the upper monitor via communication Select the controlling communication command channel of the inverter. Communicati P00.02 on running commands channel 0:MODBUS communication channel 1:PROFIBUS communication channel 2:Ethernet communication channel 3:CAN communication channel Note: 1, 2 and 3 are extension functions which can be used only when corresponding extension cards are configured. This parameter is used to set the maximum output P00.03 Max. output frequency frequency of the inverter. Users should pay attention to this parameter because it is the foundation of the frequency setting and the speed of acceleration and deceleration. 49 50.00H z ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y Setting range: P00.04~400.00Hz The upper limit of the running frequency is the upper Upper limit of limit of the output frequency of the inverter which is P00.04 the running lower than or equal to the maximum frequency. frequency Setting range:P00.05~P00.03 (Max. output 50.00H ◎ z frequency) The lower limit of the running frequency is that of the output frequency of the inverter. Lower limit of P00.05 the running frequency The inverter runs at the lower limit frequency if the set frequency is lower than the lower limit one. Note: Max. output frequency ≥ Upper limit frequency 0.00Hz ◎ 0 ○ 1 ○ ≥ Lower limit frequency Setting range:0.00Hz~P00.04 (Upper limit of the running frequency) P00.06 A frequency 0:Keypad data setting command Modify the value of function code P00.10 (set the frequency by keypad) to modify the frequency by the keypad. 1:Analog AI1 setting 2:Analog AI2 setting 3:Analog AI3 setting Set the frequency by analog input terminals. Goodrive300 series inverters provide 3 ways analog input terminals as the standard configuration, of P00.07 B frequency which AI1/AI2 are the voltage/current option command (0~10V/0~20mA) which can be shifted by jumpers; while AI3 is voltage input (-10V~+10V). Note: when analog AI1/AI2 select 0~20mA input, the corresponding voltage of 20mA is 10V. 100.0% of the analog input setting corresponds to the maximum frequency (function code P00.03) in forward direction and -100.0% corresponds to the maximum frequency in reverse direction (function code P00.03) 50 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters 4:High-speed pulse HDI setting The frequency is set by high-speed pulse terminals. Goodrive300 series inverters provide 1 way high speed pulse input as the standard configuration. The pulse frequency range is 0.0~50.00kHz. 100.0% of the high speed pulse input setting corresponds to the maximum frequency in forward direction (function code P00.03) and -100.0% corresponds to the maximum frequency in reverse direction (function code P00.03). Note: The pulse setting can only be input by multi-function terminals HDI. Set P05.00 (HDI input selection) to high speed pulse input, and set P05.49 (HDI high speed pulse input function selection) to frequency setting input. 5:Simple PLC program setting The inverter runs at simple PLC program mode when P00.06=5 or P00.07=5. Set P10 (simple PLC and multi-stage speed control) to select the running frequency, running direction, ACC/DEC time and the keeping time of corresponding stage. See the function description of P10 for detailed information. 6: Multi-stage speed running setting The inverter runs at multi-stage speed mode when P00.06=6 or P00.07=6. Set P05 to select the current running stage, and set P10 to select the current running frequency. The multi-stage speed has the priority when P00.06 or P00.07 does not equal to 6, but the setting stage can only be the 1~15 stage. The setting stage is 1~15 if P00.06 or P00.07 equals to 6. 7: PID control setting The running mode of the inverter is process PID control when P00.06=7 or P00.07=7. It is necessary 51 Default Modif value y Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0 ○ to set P09. The running frequency of the inverter is the value after PID effect. See P09 for the detailed information of the given source, given value, feedback source of PID. 8:MODBUS communication setting The frequency is set by MODBUS communication. See P14 for detailed information. 9:PROFIBUS communication setting The frequency is set by PROFIBUS communication. See P15 for the detailed information. 10:Ethernet communication setting(reserved) 11:CAN communication setting(reserved) Note:A frequency and B frequency can not set as the same frequency given method. 0:Maximum output frequency, B frequency setting 100% of corresponds to the maximum B frequency output frequency P00.08 command 1:A frequency command, 100% of B frequency reference setting corresponds to the maximum output frequency. Select this setting if it needs to adjust on the base of A frequency command. 0: A, the current frequency setting is A freauency command 1: B, the current frequency setting is B frequency command 2: A+B, the current frequency setting is A frequency Combination command + B frequency command P00.09 of the setting 3: A-B, the current frequency setting is A frequency source command - B frequency command 4: Max (A, B):The bigger one between A frequency command and B frequency is the set frequency. 5: Min (A, B):The lower one between A frequency command and B frequency is the set frequency. Note:The combination manner can be shifted by 52 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y P5(terminal function) When A and B frequency commands are selected as P00.10 Keypad set frequency “keypad setting”, the value of the function code is the original setting one of the frequency data of the inverter. 50.00H ○ z Setting range:0.00 Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) ACC time means the time needed if the inverter P00.11 speeds up from 0Hz to the Max. One (P00.03). ACC time 1 DEC time means the time needed if the inverter Depend on ○ speeds down from the Max. Output frequency to 0Hz model (P00.03). Goodrive300 series inverters define four groups of ACC/DEC time which can be selected by P05. The P00.12 DEC time 1 factory default ACC/DEC time of the inverter is the first group. Depend on ○ model Setting range of P00.11 and P00.12:0.0~3600.0s 0: Runs at the default direction, the inverter runs in the forward direction. FWD/REV indicator is off. 1:Runs at the oppositing direction, the inverter runs in the reverse direction. FWD/REV indicator is on. Modify the function code to shift the rotation direction of the motor. This effect equals to the shifting the rotation direction by adjusting either two of the motor P00.13 Running direction lines (U, V and W). The motor rotation direction can be changed by QUICK/JOG on the keypad. Refer to parameter P07.02. Note: When the function parameter comes back to the default value, the motor’s running direction will come back to the factory default state, too. In some cases it should be used with caution after commissioning if the change of rotation direction is disabled. 2: Forbid to run in reverse direction: It can be used in 53 0 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y some special cases if the reverse running is disabled. The relationship table of the motor type and carrier frequency: The factory value of Motor type carrier frequency 1.5~11kW 8kHz 15~55kW 4kHz Above 75kW 2kHz The advantage of high carrier frequency: ideal Carrier P00.14 frequency setting current waveform, little current harmonic wave and Depend on motor noise. The disadvantage of high carrier frequency: increasing the switch loss, increasing inverter temperature and the impact to the output capacity. The inverter needs to derate on high carrier frequency. At the same time, the leakage and electrical magnetic interference will increase. Applying low carrier frequency is contrary to the above, too low carrier frequency will cause unstable running, torque decreasing and surge. The manufacturer has set a reasonal carrier frequency when the inverter is in factory. In general, users do not need to change the parameter. When the frequency used exceeds the default carrier frequency, the inverter needs to derate 20% for each 54 model ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ◎ 1 ○ 0 ◎ 0 ◎ 0 ◎ additional 1k carrier frequency. Setting range:1.0~15.0kHz 0:No operation 1:Rotation autotuning Comprehensive motor parameter autotune It is recommended to use rotation autotuning when high control accuracy is needed. Motor P00.15 2: Static autotuning 1(autotune totally); It is suitable parameter in the cases when the motor can not de-couple form autotuning the load. The antotuning for the motor parameter will impact the control accuracy. 3: Static autotuning 2(autotune part parameters); when the current motor is motor 1, autotune P02.06, P02.07, P02.08; and when the current motor is motor 2, autotune P12.06, P12.07, P02.08. 0:Invalid P00.16 AVR function selection 1:Valid during the whole prodecure The auto-adjusting function of the inverter can cancel the impact on the output voltage of the inverter because of the bus voltage fluctuation. P00.17 Reserved Reserved 0:No operation 1:Restore the default value Function P00.18 restore 2:Cancel the fault record Note: The function code will restore to 0 after parameter finishing the operation of the selected function code. Restoring to the default value will cancel the user password, please use this function with caution. P01 Group Start-up and stop control 0:Start-up directly:start from the starting frequency P01.01 P01.00 Start mode 1:Start-up after DC braking: start the motor from the starting frequency after DC braking (set the parameter P01.03 and P01.04). It is suitable in the 55 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.50Hz ◎ 0.0s ◎ 0.0% ◎ cases where reverse rotation may occur to the low inertia load during starting. 2: Start-up after reverse tracing: start the rotating motor smoothly after tracking the rotation speed and direction automatically. It is suitable in the cases where reverse rotation may occur to the big inertia load during starting. Note: it is recommended to start the synchronous motor directly. Starting P01.01 frequency of direct start Starting frequency of direct start-up means the original frequency during the inverter starting. See P01.02 for detailed information. Setting range: 0.00~50.00Hz Set a proper starting frequency to increase the torque of the inverter during starting. During the retention time of the starting frequency, the output frequency of the inverter is the starting frequency. And then, the inverter will run from the starting frequency to the set frequency. If the set frequency is lower than the starting frequency, the inverter will stop running and keep in the stand-by state. The Retention P01.02 starting frequency is not limited in the lower limit time of the frequency. starting frequency Setting range: 0.0~50.0s P01.03 The braking The inverter will carry out DC braking at the braking 56 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters current current set before starting and it will speed up after before the DC braking time. If the DC braking time is set to starting 0, the DC braking is invalid. Default Modif value y 0.0s ◎ 0 ◎ The stronger the braking current, the bigger the The braking P01.04 time before starting braking power. The DC braking current before starting means the percentage of the rated current of the inverter. The setting range of P01.03: 0.0~150.0% The setting range of P01.04: 0.0~50.0s The changing mode of the frequency during start-up and running. 0:Linear type The output frequency increases or decreases linearly. ACC/DEC P01.05 selection 1: Reserved P01.06 Reserved Reserv ◎ ed P01.07 Reserved Reserv ed 57 ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0.00Hz ○ 0.0s ○ 0: Decelerate to stop: after the stop command becomes valid, the inverter decelerates to decrease the output frequency during the set time. When the P01.08 Stop mode frequency decreases to 0, the inverter stops. 1: Coast to stop: after the stop command becomes valid, the inverter ceases the output immediately. And the load coasts to stop at the mechanical inertia. Starting The starting frequency of stop braking: the inverter P01.09 frequency of will carry on stop DC braking when the frequency is DC braking arrived during the procedure of decelerating to stop. Waiting time The waiting time of stop braking: before the stop DC P01.10 before DC braking, the inverter will close output and begin to braking P01.11 carry on the DC braking after the waiting time. This DC braking action is used to avoid the overcurrent fault caused by DC braking when the speed is too high. current ○ 0.0% Stop DC braking current: the DC brake added. The ○ stronger the current, the bigger the DC braking effect. The braking time of stop braking:The retention time of DC brake. If the time is 0, the DC brake is invalid. The inverter will stop at the set deceleration time. DC braking P01.12 0.0s time Setting range of P01.09: 0.00~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) Setting range of P01.10: 0.0~50.0s 58 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0s ○ 0 ◎ 0.50 Hz ◎ 0 ◎ 0.05s ◎ Setting range of P01.11: 0.0~150.0% Setting range of P01.12: 0.0~50.0s During the procedure of switching for/rev rotation, set the threshold by P01.14, which is as the table below: Dead time of P01.13 FWD/REV rotation Setting range: 0.0~3600.0s Shifting between P01.14 FWD/REV rotation P01.15 Stopping speed Set the threshold point of the inverter: 0:Switch after 0 frequency 1:Switch after the starting frequency 2: Switch after the speed reach P01.15 and delay for P01.24 0.00~100.00Hz 0: Speed setting (the only detection method in V/F mode) Detection of 1: Speed detecting value P01.16 stopping speed When the actual output frequency of the inverter is lower than P01.15 and the lasting time is beyond P01.17, the running state ends and the inverter stops. Detection If set P01.16 to 1, the feedback frequency is less P01.17 time of the than or equal to P01.15 and detect in the set time of feedback P01.17, the inverter will stop; otherwise the inverter 59 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name speed Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0 ◎ will stop after the set time of P01.17. Setting range:0.0~100.0s (only valid when P01.16=1) When the running command channel is the terminal control, the system will detect the state of the running terminal during powering on. 0:The terminal running command is invalid when Terminal running P01.18 protection when powering on powering on. Even the running command is detected to be valid during powering on, the inverter won’t run and the system keeps in the protection state until the running command is canceled and enabled again. 1: The terminal running command is valid when powering on. If the running command is detected to be valid during powering on, the system will start the inverter automatically after the initialization. Note: this function should be selected with cautions, or serious result may follow. The running frequency is lower than the lower P01.19 limit one (valid if the lower limit frequency is above 0) This function code determines the running state of the inverter when the set frequency is lower than the lower-limit one. 0: Run at the lower-limit frequency 1: Stop 2: Hibernation The inverter will coast to stop when the set frequency is lower than the lower-limit one.if the set frequency is above the lower limit one again and it lasts for the time set by P01.20, the inverter will 60 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0s ○ 0 ○ 1.0s ○ come back to the running state automatically. This function code determines the Hibernation delay time. When the running frequency of the inverter is lower than the lower limit one, the inverter will pause to stand by. When the set frequency is above the lower limit one again and it lasts for the time set by P01.20, the inverter will run automatically. Hibernation Note: The time is the total value when the set P01.20 restore delay frequency is above the lower limit one. time Setting range: 0.0~3600.0s (valid when P01.19=2) This function can enable the inverter start or not after the power off and then power on. P01.21 Restart after 0: Ddisable power off 1: Enable, if the starting need is met, the inverter will run automatically after waiting for the time defined by P01.22. The waiting P01.22 time of restart after The function determines the waiting time before the automatic running of the inverter when powering off and then powering on. power off 61 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0s ○ 0.0s ● 0 ● 0 ◎ Setting range: 0.0~3600.0s (valid when P01.21=1) The function determines the brake release after the P01.23 Start delay time running command is given, and the inverter is in a stand-by state and wait for the delay time set by P01.23 Setting range: 0.0~60.0s Delay time of P01.24 the stop Setting range: 0.0~100.0 s speed Select the output mode at 0Hz. P01.25 0Hz output 0: Output without voltage selection 1: Output with voltage 2: Output at DC braking current at stopping P02 Group Motor 1 0:Asynchronous motor P02.00 Motor type 1 1:Synchronous motor Note: Switch the current motor by the switching channel of P08.31. Asynchronou P02.01 Depend s motor 1 0.1~3000.0kW on rated power ◎ model Asynchronou P02.02 s motor 1 rated 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00H ◎ z frequency P02.03 Asynchronou s motor 1 Depend 1~36000rpm on 62 ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P02.04 P02.05 Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters model Asynchronou Depend s motor 1 0~1200V on rated voltage model Asynchronou Depend s motor 1 0.8~6000.0A on s motor 1 stator 0.001~65.535Ω on on rotor resistor Depend 0.1~6553.5mH on inductance mutual Depend 0.1~6553.5mH on inductance s motor 1 non-load ○ model Asynchronou P02.10 ○ model Asynchronou s motor 1 ○ model Asynchronou P02.09 ○ Depend s motor 1 0.001~65.535Ω leakage ◎ model resistor s motor 1 ◎ Depend Asynchronou P02.08 y model Asynchronou P02.07 value rated speed rated current P02.06 Default Modif Depend 0.1~6553.5A on ○ model current Magnetic saturation P02.11 coefficient 1 0.0~100.0% 80.0% ◎ 68.0% ◎ for the iron core of AM1 P02.12 Magnetic 0.0~100.0% saturation 63 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 57.0% ◎ 40.0% ◎ coefficient 2 for the iron core of AM1 Magnetic saturation P02.13 coefficient 3 0.0~100.0% for the iron core of AM1 Magnetic saturation P02.14 coefficient 4 0.0~100.0% for the iron core of AM1 Synchronous Depend P02.15 motor 1 rated 0.1~3000.0kW on power ◎ model Synchronous P02.16 motor 1 rated 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) frequency 50.00H ◎ z Synchronous P02.17 motor 1 number of 1~50 2 ◎ poles pairs Synchronous Depend P02.18 motor 1 rated 0~1200V on voltage model Synchronous Depend P02.19 motor 1 rated 0.8~6000.0A on current motor 1 stator ◎ model Synchronous P02.20 ◎ Depend 0.001~65.535Ω on model resistor 64 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Synchronous P02.21 motor 1 Direct axis Default Modif value y Depend 0.1~6553.5mH on ○ model inductance Synchronous Depend motor 1 P02.22 Quadrature 0.1~655.35mH on axis ○ model inductance When P00.15=2, the set value of P02.23 cannot be updated by autotuning, please count according to the following method. The counter-electromotive force constant can be counted according to the parameters on the name plate of the motor. There are three ways to count: 1. If the name plate designate the Synchronous P02.23 motor 1 Back EMF constant counter-electromotive force constant Ke, then: E=(Ke*nN*2π)/ 60 2. If the name plate designate the 300 ○ counter-electromotive force constant E’(V/1000r/min), then: E=E’*nN/1000 3. If the name plate does not designate the above parameters, then: E=P/√3*I In the above formulas: nN is the rated rotation speed, P is the rated power and I is the rated current. Setting range: 0~10000 P02.24 Reserved P02.25 Reserved Motor 1 P02.26 overload protection ● ● 0:No protection 1: Common motor (with low speed compensation). Because the heat-releasing effect of the common motors will be weakened, the corresponding electric 65 2 ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 100.0% ○ heat protection will be adjusted properly. The low speed compensation characteristic mentioned here means reducing the threshold of the overload protection of the motor whose running frequency is below 30Hz. 2: Frequency conversion motor (without low speed compensation) Because the heat-releasing effect of the specific motors won’t be impacted by the rotation speed, it is not necessary to adjust the protection value during low-speed running. When P02.27=overload protection current of the motor/rated current of the motor So, the bigger the overload coefficient is, the shorter the reporting time of the overload fault is. When the overload coefficient <110%, there is no overload protection. When the overload coefficient =116%, the fault will be reported after 1 hour, when the P02.27 Motor 1 over overload coefficient=200%, the fault will be reported after 1 minute. load protection coefficient Setting range: 20.0%~120.0% P02.28 Parameter P02.29 ● Reserved display of motor 1 P03 Group 0: Display according to the motor type 1: Display all Vector control 66 0 ● Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 20.0 ○ 0.200s ○ 5.00Hz ○ 20.0 ○ 0.200s ○ Speed loop The parameters P03.00~P03.05 only apply to vector P03.00 proportional control mode. Below the switching frequency gain1 1(P03.02), the speed loop PI parameters are: Speed loop P03.00 and P03.01. Above the switching frequency P03.01 P03.02 integral 2(P03.05), the speed loop PI parameters are: time1 P03.03 and P03.04. PI parameters are gained Low according to the linear change of two groups of switching parameters. It is shown as below: frequency Speed loop P03.03 proportional gain 2 Speed loop P03.04 integral time 2 Setting the proportional coefficient and integral time of the adjustor and change the dynamic response performance of vector control speed loop. Increasing the proportional gain and decreasing the integral time can speed up the dynamic response of the speed loop. But too high proportional gain and too low integral time may cause system vibration and High P03.05 switching overshoot. Too low proportional gain may cause system vibration and speed static deviation. PI has a close relationship with the inertia of the frequency system. Adjust on the base of PI according to different loads to meet various demands. The setting range of P03.00:0~200.0 The setting range of P03.01:0.001~10.000s The setting range of P03.02:0.00Hz~P03.05 The setting range of P03.03:0~200.0 The setting range of P03.04:0.001~10.000s 67 10.00H z ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 100% ○ 100% ○ 1000 ○ 1000 ○ 0 ○ The setting range of P03.05:P03.02~P00.03(the Max. frequency) P03.06 Speed loop output filter 0~8( corresponds to 0~28/10ms) Vector control P03.07 electromotio n slip compensatio n coefficient Vector control brake P03.08 Slip compensation coefficient is used to adjust the slip frequency of the vector control and improve the speed control accuracy of the system. Adjusting the parameter properly can control the speed steady-state error. Setting range:50%~200% slip compensatio n coefficient Current loop Note: P03.09 percentage 1 These two parameters adjust the PI adjustment coefficient P parameter of the current loop which affects the dynamic response speed and control accuracy Current loop P03.10 integral coefficient 1 directly. Generally, users do not need to change the default value. 2 Only apply to the vector control mode without PG 0(P00.00=0). Setting range:0~65535 This parameter is used to enable the torque control mode, and set the torque setting means. 0:Torque control is invalid Torque P03.11 setting method 1:Keypad setting torque(P03.12) 2:Analog AI1 setting torque 3:Analog AI2 setting torque 4:Analog AI3 setting torque 5:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque 6: Multi-stage torque setting 7:MODBUS communication setting torque 68 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(motor rated current) 50.0% ○ 0.000~10.000s ○ 8:PROFIBUS communication setting torque 9:Ethernet communication setting torque 10:CAN communication setting torque Note: 100% of Setting methods 2~10, corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor. Keypad P03.12 setting torque P03.13 Torque given filter time Torque 0:keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.16 sets control P03.14,P03.17 sets P03.15) forward 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency rotation P03.14 upper-limit frequency setting source selection Torque control reverse P03.15 0.100s rotation 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit frequency 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit frequency 0 ○ 0 ○ 50.00 ○ 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency 5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit frequency 6:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency 7:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency 8:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit upper-limit frequency frequency 9:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency keypad Note:setting method 1~9, 100% corresponds to the defined value maximum frequency This function is used to set the upper limit of the frequency. P03.16 sets the value of P03.14; P03.17 sets the value of P03.15. P03.16 Torque control Setting range:0.00 Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output frequency) forward rotation upper-limit frequency 69 Hz Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y keypad defined value Torque control reverse P03.17 rotation 50.00 upper-limit Hz ○ frequency keypad defined value Electromotio This function code is used to select the n torque electromotion and braking torque upper-limit setting upper-limit source selection. P03.18 setting 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.20 sets source P03.18,P03.21 sets P03.19) selection 0 ○ 0 ○ 180.0% ○ 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit torque 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit torque 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit torque 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit torque Braking torque upper-limit P03.19 setting source selection 5:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit torque 6:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit torque 7:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit torque 8:CAN communication setting upper-limit torque Note:setting method 1~9,100% corresponds to three times of the motor current. Electromotio n P03.20 torque The function code is used to set the limit of the upper-limit torque. keypad Setting range:0.0~300.0%(motor rated current) setting 70 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 180.0% ○ 0.3 ○ 20% ○ 100.0% ◎ 0.300s ○ 1000 ○ Braking torque P03.21 upper-limit keypad setting Weakening The usage of motor in weakening control. P03.22 coefficient in constant power zone The lowest Function code P03.22 and P03.23 are effective at weakening constant power. The motor will enter into the P03.23 point in Constant weakening state when the motor runs at rated speed. Change the weakening curve by modifying power zone the weakening control coefficienct. The bigger the weakening control coefficienct is, the steeper the weak curve is. The setting range of P03.22:0.1~2.0 The setting range of P03.23:10%~100% P03.24 Max. voltage limit P03.24 set the Max. Voltage of the inverter, which is dependent on the site situation. The setting range:0.0~120.0% Preactivate the motor when the inverter starts up. Pre-exciting P03.25 time Build up a magnetic field inside the inverter to improve the torque performance during the starting process. The setting time:0.000~10.000s Weak P03.26 magnetic 0~8000 Note: P03.24~P03.26 are invalid for vector mode. 71 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0 ◎ proportional gain Vector control P03.27 speed display 0: Display the actual value 1: Display the setting value selection P04 Group V/F control These function codes define the V/F curve of Goodrive300 motor 1 to meet the need of different loads. 0:Straight line V/F curve;applying to the constant torque load 1:Multi-dots V/F curve 2:1.3th power low torque V/F curve 3:1.7th power low torque V/F curve 4:2.0th power low torque V/F curve P04.00 Motor 1V/F Curves 2~4 apply to the torque loads such as fans curve setting and water pumps. Users can adjust according to the features of the loads to achieve a best energy-consuming effect. 5:Customized V/F(V/F separation);on this mode, V and F can be separated from f and f can be adjusted through the frequency given channel set by P00.06 or the voltage given channel set by P04.27 to change the feature of the curve. Note:Vb in the below picture is the motor rated voltage and fb is the motor rated frequency. 72 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P04.01 Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters Motor 1 Torque boost to the output voltage for the features of torque boost low frequency torque. P04.01 is for the Max. Output Default Modif value y 0.0% ○ 20.0% ○ voltage Vb. P04.02 defines the percentage of closing frequency of manual torque to fb. Torque boost should be selected according to the load. The bigger the load is, the bigger the torque is. Too big torque boost is inappropriate because the motor will run with over magnetic, and the current of the inverter will increase to add the temperature of the inverter and decrease the efficiency. When the torque boost is set to 0.0%, the inverter is Motor 1 automatic torque boost. P04.02 torque boost Torque boost threshold: on this frequency point, the close torque boost is effective, but over this frequency point, the torque boost is ineffective. The setting range of P04.01:0.0%:(automatic)0.1%~10.0% 73 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.00Hz ○ 00.0% ○ The setting range of P04.02:0.0%~50.0% Motor 1V/F P04.03 Frequency point 1 Motor 1 V/F P04.04 Voltage point 1 Motor 1 V/F P04.05 00.00H Frequency Motor 1 V/F When P04.00 =1, the user can set V//F curve P04.06 voltage point through P04.03~P04.08. V/F is generally set according to the load of the 2 Motor 1 V/F P04.07 Frequency point 3 ○ z point 2 00.0% ○ motor. Note:V1<V2<V3,f1<f2<f3. Too high low frequency voltage will heat the motor excessively or 00.00H ○ z damage. The inverter may loss the overcurrent speed or overcurrent protection. The setting range of P04.03: 0.00Hz~P04.05 The setting range of P04.04:0.0%~110.0% The setting range of P04.05:P04.03~ P04.07 Motor 1 V/F P04.08 voltage point 3 The setting range of P04.06:0.0%~110.0%(the rated voltage of motor 1) 00.0% ○ 0.0% ○ The setting range of P04.07:P04.05~ P02.02(the rated frequency of motor 1) or P04.05~ P02.16(the rated frequency of motor 1) The setting range of P04.08:0.0%~110.0%(the rated voltage of motor 1) Motor 1 V/F This function code is used to compensate the P04.09 slip change of the rotation speed caused by load during compensatio compensation V/F control to improve the rigidity of n gain the motor. It can be set to the rated slip frequency of 74 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 10 ○ 10 ○ the motor which is counted as below: △f=fb-n*p/60 Of which, fb is the rated frequency of the motor, its function code is P02.01; n is the rated rotating speed of the motor and its function code is P02.02;p is the pole pair of the motor. 100.0% corresponds to the rated slip frequency△f. Setting range:0.0~200.0% Motor 1 low P04.10 frequency vibration control factor Motor 1 high P04.11 frequency vibration control factor Motor 1 P04.12 vibration In the V/F control mode, current fluctuation may occur to the motor on some frequency, especially the motor with big power. The motor can not run stably or overcurrent may occur. These phenomena can be canceled by adjusting this parameter. The setting range of P04.10:0~100 The setting range of P04.11:0~100 The setting range of P04.12:0.00Hz~P00.03(the 30.00 Max. frequency) control ○ Hz threshold P04.13 P04.14 P04.15 Motor 2 V/F This group of parameters defines the V/F setting curve setting means of Goodrive300 motor 2 to meet the features Motor 2 P04.16 Motor 2 Note: P04 group contains two sets of V/F torque parameters of the motor which cannot display 0.0% ○ 20.0% ○ 0.00Hz ○ 00.0% ○ 00.00H ○ simultaneously. Only the selected V/F parameter can Motor 2V/F be shown. The motor selection can be defined by frequency terminals function “the shift between motor 1 and point 1 ◎ of different loads. See P04.00~P04.12 for the torque boost detailed function code instruction. threshold 0 motor 2” Motor 2V/F P04.17 voltage point 1 P04.18 Motor 2V/F 75 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters frequency Default Modif value y z point 2 Motor 2V/F P04.19 voltage point 00.0% ○ 2 Motor 2V/F P04.20 00.00H frequency ○ z point 3 Motor 2V/F P04.21 voltage point 00.0% ○ 0.0% ○ 10 ○ 10 ○ 3 Motor 2 V/F P04.22 slip compensatio n gain Motor 2 low P04.23 frequency vibration control factor Motor 2 high P04.24 frequency vibration control factor Motor 2 P04.25 vibration In the V/F control mode, current fluctuation may occur to the motor on some frequency, especially the motor with big power. The motor can not run stably or overcurrent may occur. These phenomena can be canceled by adjusting this parameter. The setting range of P04.23:0~100 The setting range of P04.24:0~100 The setting range of P04.25:0.00Hz~P00.03(the 30.00 Max. frequency) control ○ Hz threshold Energy-savin P04.26 g operation selection P04.27 0:No operation 1:Automatic energy-saving operation Motor on the light load conditions, automatically 0 ◎ 0 ○ adjusts the output voltage to save energy Voltage Select the output setting channel at V/F curve Setting separation. Channel 0: Keypad setting voltage: the output voltage is 76 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 100.0% ○ 5.0s ○ 5.0s ○ 100.0% ◎ 0.0% ◎ determined by P04.28. 1:AI1 setting voltage ; 2:AI2 setting voltage; 3:AI3 setting voltage; 4:HDI1 setting voltage; 5:Multi-stage speed setting voltage; 6:PID setting voltage; 7:MODBUS communication setting voltage; 8:PROFIBUS communication setting voltage; 9:Ethernet communication setting voltage; 10:CAN communication setting voltage; Note:100% corresponds to the rated voltage of the motor. Keypad P04.28 setting voltage Voltage P04.29 Voltage decreasing time Maximum P04.31 output voltage Minimum P04.32 when the voltage setting channel is selected as “keypad selection” The setting range:0.0%~100.0% Voltage increasing time is the time when the inverter increasing accelerates from the output minimum voltage to the time P04.30 The function code is the voltage digital set value output output maximum voltage. Voltage decreasing time is the time when the inverter decelerates from the output maximum voltage to the output minimum voltage. The setting range:0.0~3600.0s Set the upper and low limit of the output voltage. The setting range of P04.31:P04.32~100.0%(the rated voltage of the motor) The setting range of P04.32:0.0%~ P04.31(the rated voltage of the motor) voltage 77 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ◎ 1 ◎ 4 ◎ 7 ◎ S4 terminals 9: External fault input P05.04 function 10:Increasing frequency setting(UP) selection 11:Decreasing frequency setting(DOWN) 0 ◎ S5 terminals 12:Cancel the frequency change setting P05.05 function 13:Shift between A setting and B setting selection 14:Shift between combination setting and A setting 0 ◎ 0 ◎ 0 ◎ P05 Group Input terminals HDI input P05.00 type selection 0:HDI is high pulse input. See P05.49~P05.54 1:HDI is switch input. See P05.09 S1 terminals 0: No function P05.01 function 1: Forward rotation operation selection 2: Reverse rotation operation S2 terminals 3: 3-wire control operation P05.02 function 4: Forward rotation jogging selection 5: Reverse rotation jogging S3 terminals 6: Coast to stop P05.03 function 7: Fault reset selection 8: Operation pause S6 terminals P05.06 function selection S7 terminals P05.07 function selection 15:Shift between combination setting and B setting 16:Multi-stage speed terminal 1 17:Multi-stage speed terminal 2 18:Multi-stage speed terminal 3 19:Multi- stage speed terminal 4 20:Multi- stage speed pause 78 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Default Modif Detailed instruction of parameters value y 0 ◎ 0 ◎ 0x000 ○ 0.010s ○ S8 terminals 21:ACC/DEC time option1 P05.08 function 22:ACC/DEC time option2 selection 23:Simple PLC stop reset 24:Simple PLC pause 25:PID control pause 26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current frequency) 27:Traverse reset(return to the center frequency) 28:Counter reset 29:Torque control prohibition 30:ACC/DEC prohibition 31:Counter trigger HDI terminal 32:Length reset P05.09 function 33:Cancel the frequency change setting temporarily selection 34:DC brake 35:Shift the motor 1 into motor 2 36:Shift the command to the keypad 37:Shift the command to the terminals 38:Shift the command to the communication 39:Pre-magnetized command 40:Clear the power 41:Keep the power 42~63:Reserved The function code is used to set the polarity of the input terminals. Set the bit to 0, the input terminal is anode. Polarity P05.10 selection of the input terminals Set the bit to 1, the input terminal is cathode. BIT0 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 BIT9 S6 S7 S8 HDI The setting range:0x000~0x1FF P05.11 ON-OFF filter time Set the sample filter time of S1~S8 and HDI terminals. If the interference is strong, increase the parameter to avoid the disoperation. 79 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ◎ 0 ◎ 0.000~1.000s Enable the input function of virtual terminals at the communication mode. 0:Virtual terminals is invalid Virtual P05.12 terminals setting 1:MODBUS communication virtual terminals are valid 2:PROFIBUS communication virtual terminals are valid 3: Ethernet communication virtual terminals are valid 4: CAN communication virtual terminals are valid Set the operation mode of the terminals control 0:2-wire control 1, comply the enable with the direction. This mode is widely used. It determines the rotation direction by the defined FWD and REV terminals command. Terminals P05.13 control running mode 1:2-wire control 2;Separate the enable from the direction. FWD defined by this mode is the enabling ones. The direction depends on the state of the defined REV. 80 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters 2:3-wire control 1; Sin is the enabling terminal on this mode, and the running command is caused by FWD and the direction is controlled by REV. Sin is natural closed. 3:3-wire control 2; Sin is the enabling terminal on this mode, and the running command is caused by SB1 or SB3 and both of them control the running direction.NC SB2 generates the stop command. Note: for the 2-wire running mode, when FWD/REV terminal is effective, the inverter stop because of the stopping command from other sources, even the control terminal FWD/REV keeps effective; the inverter won’t work when the stopping command is canceled. Only when FWD/REV is relaunched, the inverter can start again. For example, the effective 81 Default Modif value y Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ STOP/RSTstop when PLC signal cycles stop, fixed-length stop and terminal control (see P07.04). S1 terminal P05.14 switching-on delay time S1 P05.15 terminal switching-off delay time S2 terminal The function code defines the corresponding delay time of electrical level of the programmable terminals from switching on to switching off. P05.16 switching-on delay time S2 P05.17 terminal switching-off delay time S3 terminal P05.18 switching-on delay time S3 P05.19 terminal switching-off delay time S4 terminal P05.20 switching-on delay time Setting range:0.000~50.000s S4 P05.21 terminal switching-off delay time P05.22 S5 82 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ terminal switching-on delay time S5 P05.23 terminal switching-off delay time S6 P05.24 terminal switching-on delay time S6 P05.25 terminal switching-off delay time S7 P05.26 terminal switching-on delay time S7 P05.27 terminal switching-off delay time S8 P05.28 terminal switching-on delay time S8 P05.29 terminal switching-off delay time 83 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.00V ○ 0.0% ○ 10.00V ○ 100.0% ○ 0.100s ○ 0.00V ○ 0.0% ○ 10.00V ○ 100.0% ○ HDI P05.30 terminal switching-on delay time HDI P05.31 terminal switching-off delay time P05.32 Lower limit of The function code defines the relationship between AI1 the analog input voltage and its corresponding set Correspondi value. If the analog input voltage beyond the set P05.33 ng setting of minimum or maximum input value, the inverter will the lower count at the minimum or maximum one. limit of AI1 When the analog input is the current input, the P05.34 Upper limit of corresponding voltage of 0~20mA is 0~10V. AI1 In different cases, the corresponding rated value of Correspondi 100.0% is different. See the application for detailed P05.35 ng setting of information. the upper The figure below illustrates different applications: limit of AI1 P05.36 P05.37 AI1 input filter time Lower limit of AI2 Correspondi P05.38 ng setting of the lower limit of AI2 P05.39 Upper limit of AI2 P05.40 Correspondi Input filter time: this parameter is used to adjust the sensitivity of the analog input. Increasing the value properly can enhance the anti-interference of the analog, but weaken the sensitivity of the analog input. 84 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.100s ○ -10.00V ○ ng setting of Note: Analog AI1 and AI2 can support 0~10V or the upper 0~20mA input, when AI1 and AI2 selects 0~20mA limit of AI2 input, the corresponding voltage of 20mA is 5V. AI3 P05.41 P05.42 AI2 input can support the output of -10V~+10V. filter time The setting range of P05.32:0.00V~P05.34 Lower limit of The setting range of P05.33:-100.0%~100.0% AI3 The setting range of P05.34:P05.32~10.00V Correspondi The setting range of P05.35:-100.0%~100.0% P05.43 ng setting of The setting range of P05.36:0.000s~10.000s the lower The setting range of P05.37:0.00V~P05.39 -100.0 ○ % limit of AI3 The setting range of P05.38:-100.0%~100.0% P05.44 Middle value The setting range of P05.39:P05.37~10.00V The setting range of P05.40:-100.0%~100.0% of AI3 Correspondi P05.45 ng middle setting of AI3 P05.46 Upper limit of AI3 Correspondi P05.47 ng setting of 0.00V ○ 0.0% ○ 10.00V ○ 100.0% ○ 0.100s ○ 0 ◎ The setting range of P05.41:0.000s~10.000s The setting range of P05.42:-10.00V~P05.44 The setting range of P05.43:-100.0%~100.0% The setting range of P05.44:P05.42~P05.46 The setting range of P05.45:-100.0%~100.0% The setting range of P05.46:P05.44~10.00V The setting range of P05.47:-100.0%~100.0% The setting range of P05.48:0.000s~10.000s the upper limit of AI3 P05.48 AI3 input filter time HDI high-speed P05.49 pulse input function selection The function selection when HDI terminals is high-speed pulse input 0:Frequency setting input, frequency setting source 1:Counter input, high-speed pulse counter input terminals 2:Length counting input, length counter input 85 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y terminals Lower limit 0.00KH P05.50 frequency of 0.00 KHz ~ P05.52 ○ z HDI Correspondi ng setting of P05.51 HDI low -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% ○ frequency setting Upper limit 50.00K P05.52 frequency of P05.50 ~50.00KHz ○ Hz HDI Correspondi ng setting of P05.53 upper limit -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% ○ 0.100s ○ 0 ◎ 0 ○ frequency of HDI HDI P05.54 frequency input filter 0.000s~10.000s time P06 Group Output terminals The function selection of the high-speed pulse output terminals. 0: Open collector pole high speed pulse output: The P06.00 HDO output Max.pulse frequency is 50.0kHz. See P06.27~P06.31 for detailed information of the related functions. 1: Open collector pole output. See P06.02 for detailed information of the related functions. P06.01 Y output 0:Invalid 86 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters P06.02 HDO output 1:In operation P06.03 Relay RO1 2:Forward rotation operation output 3:Reverse rotation operation Default Modif value y 0 ○ 1 ○ 5 ○ 00 ○ 4: Jogging operation 5:The inverter fault 6:Frequency degree test FDT1 7:Frequency degree test FDT2 8:Frequency arrival 9:Zero speed running 10:Upper limit frequency arrival 11:Lower limit frequency arrival 12:Ready for operation 13:Pre-magnetizing 14:Overload pre-alarm 15: Underload pre-alarm Relay RO2 P06.04 output 16:Completion of simple PLC stage 17:Completion of simple PLC cycle 18:Setting count value arrival 19:Defined count value arrival 20:External fault valid 21:Length arrival 22:Running time arrival 23:MODBUS communication virtual terminals output 24:PROFIBUS communication virtual terminals output 25: Ethernet communication virtual terminals output 26: CAN communication virtual terminals output 27~30: Reserved Polarity P06.05 The function code is used to set the pole of the selection of output terminal. output terminals When the current bit is set to 0, input terminal is positive. 87 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ 0.000s ○ When the current bit is set to 1, input terminal is negative. BIT0 BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 Y HDO RO1 RO2 Setting range:00~0F Y P06.06 switching-on delay time Y P06.07 switching-off The function code defines the corresponding delay delay time time of the electrical level change during the HDO programmable terminal switching on and off. P06.08 switching-on delay time HDO P06.09 switching-off delay time RO1 P06.10 switching-on delay time RO1 P06.11 switching-off delay time The setting range :0.000~50.000s RO2 Note: P06.08 and P06.08 are valid only when P06.12 switching-on P06.00=1. delay time RO2 P06.13 switching-off delay time P06.14 AO1 output 0:Running frequency 0 ○ P06.15 AO2 output 1:Set frequency 0 ○ 88 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0.0% ○ 0.00V ○ 2:Ramp reference frequency 3:Running rotation speed 4:Output current (relative to the rated current of the inverter) 5:Output current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 6:Output voltage 7:Output power 8:Set torque value 9:Output torque 10:Analog AI1 input value 11:Analog AI2 input value HDO P06.16 high-speed pulse output selection 12:Analog AI3 input value 13:High speed pulse HDI input value 14:MODBUS communication set value 1 15:MODBUS communication set value 2 16:PROFIBUS communication set value 1 17:PROFIBUS communication set value 2 18: Ethernet communication set value 1 19: Ethernet communication set value 2 20: CAN communication set value 1 21: CAN communication set value 2 22:Torque current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 23:Pre-magnetizing current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 24:Reserved P06.17 Lower limit of The above function codes define the relative AO1 output relationship between the output value and analog output. When the output value exceeds the range of set maximum or minimum output, it will count P06.18 Correspondi ng AO1 output to the according to the low-limit or upper-limit output. 89 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 100.0% ○ 10.00V ○ 0.000s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.00V ○ 100.0% ○ 10.00V ○ 0.000s ○ 0.00% ○ 0.0kHz ○ 100.0% ○ lower limit When the analog output is current output, 1mA P06.19 Upper limit of equals to 0.5V. AO1 output In different cases, the corresponding analog output The of 100% of the output value is different. See each correspondin application for detailed information. P06.20 g AO1 output A O 10 V (20 m A ) to the upper limit P06.21 P06.22 P06.23 AO1 output filter time 0 .0 % 1 00.0% Lower limit of Setting range of P06.18 0.00V~10.00V AO2 output Setting range of P06.19 P06.17~100.0% Correspondi Setting range of P06.20 0.00V~10.00V ng AO2 Setting range of P06.21 0.000s~10.000s output to the Setting range of P06.22 0.0%~P06.24 lower limit Setting range of P06.23 0.00V~10.00V P06.24 Upper limit of Setting range of P06.24 P06.22~100.0% AO2 output Setting range of P06.25 0.00V~10.00V Correspondi Setting range of P06.26 0.000s~10.000s P06.25 ng AO2 Setting range of P06.27 0.0%~P06.29 output to the Setting range of P06.28 0.00~50.00kHz upper limit Setting range of P06.29 P06.27~100.0% P06.26 P06.27 AO2 output Setting range of P06.30 0.00~50.00kHz filter time Setting range of P06.31 0.000s~10.000s Lower limit of HDO output Correspondi P06.28 ng HDO output to the lower limit P06.29 Upper limit of 90 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y HDO output Correspondi ng HDO 50.00k output to the Hz P06.30 ○ upper limit P06.31 HDO output 0.000s ○ 0 ○ 0 ◎ filter time P07 Group Human-Machine Interface 0~65535 The password protection will be valid when setting any non-zero number. 00000: Clear the previous user’s password, and make the password protection invalid. After the set user’s password becomes valid, if the password is incorrect, users cannot enter the parameter menu. Only correct password can make User’s P07.00 the user check or modify the parameters. Please password remember all users’ passwords. Retreat editing state of the function codes and the password protection will become valid in minute. If the valid password is available, press PRG/ESCto enter into the editing state of the function codes, and then “0.0.0.0.0” will be displayed. Unless input right password, the operator can not enter into it. Note: restoring to the default value can clear the password, please use it with caution. The function code determines the manner of Parameter P07.01 copy parameters copy. 0:No operation 1:Upload the local function parameter to the keypad 2:Download the keypad function parameter to local 91 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 1 ◎ address(including the motor parameters) 3:Download the keypad function parameter to local address (excluding the motor parameter of P02, P12 group) 4:Download the keypad function parameters to local address (only for the motor parameter of P02,P12 group) Note: After completing the 1~4 operations, the parameter will come back to 0 automatically; the function of upload and download excludes the factory parameters of P29. 0:No function 1: Jogging running. Press QUICK/JOG to realize the jogging running. 2: Shift the display state by the shifting key. Press QUICK/JOGto shift the displayed function code from right to left. 3: Shift between forward rotations and reverse rotations. Press QUICK/JOG to shift the direction of the frequency commands. This function is only valid QUICK/JOG in the keypad commands channels. P07.02 function 4: Clear UP/DOWN settings. Press QUICK/JOG to selection clear the set value of UP/DOWN. 5: Coast to stop. Press QUICK/JOG to coast to stop. 6: Shift the given manner of running commands. Press QUICK/JOG to shift the given manner of running commands. 7:Quick commission mode(committee according to the non-factory parameter) Note: Press QUICK/JOGto shift between forward rotation and reverse rotation, the inverter does not remember the state after shifting during powering off. 92 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0 ○ 0x03FF ○ The inverter will run in the running direction set according to parameter P00.13 during next powering on. QUICK/JOG When P07.06=6, set the shifting sequence of the shifting running command channels. sequence 0:Keypad control→terminals control P07.03 selection of →communication control running 1:Keypad control←→terminals control command 2:Keypad control←→communication control channel 3:Terminals control←→communication control STOP/RST is an effective selection key of the stop function. STOP/RST is effective in any state for the STOP/RST P07.04 stop function fault reset. 0:Only valid for the panel control 1:Both valid for panel and terminals control 2:Both valid for panel and communication control 3:Valid for all control modes 0x0000~0xFFFF BIT0:running frequency (Hz on) BIT1:set frequency(Hz flickering) BIT2:bus voltage (Hz on) BIT3:output voltage(V on) The BIT4:output current(A on) parameter BIT5:running rotation speed (rpm on) P07.05 selection 1 in BIT6:output power(% on) the running BIT7:output torque(% on) state BIT8:PID reference(% flickering) BIT9:PID feedback value(% on) BIT10:input terminals state BIT11:output terminals state BIT12:torque set value(% on) BIT13:pulse counter value 93 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y BIT14:length value BIT15:PLC and the current stage in multi-stage speed 0x0000~0xFFFF BIT0: analog AI1 value (V on) BIT1: analog AI2 value (V on) The parameter 2 P07.06 in running state BIT2: analog AI3 value (V on) BIT3: high speed pulse HDI frequency BIT4: motor overload percentage (% on) 0x0000 BIT5: the inverter overload percentage (% on) BIT6: ramp frequency given value(Hz on) BIT7: linear speed BIT8: AC inlet current (A on) BIT9~15:reserved 0x0000~0xFFFF BIT0:set frequency(Hz on, frequency flickering slowly) BIT1:bus voltage (V on) BIT2:input terminals state BIT3:output terminals state BIT4:PID reference (% flickering) The BIT5:PID feedback value(% flickering) parameter in BIT6:torque reference(% flickering) P07.07 the stop BIT7:analog AI1 value(V on) state BIT8:analog AI2 value(V on) BIT9: analog AI3 value(V on) BIT10:high speed pulse HDI frequency BIT11:PLC and the current stage in multi-stage speed BIT12:pulse counters BIT13:length value BIT14~BIT15:reserved 94 0x00FF ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P07.08 Name Detailed instruction of parameters Frequency 0.01~10.00 coefficient Displayed frequency=running frequency* P07.08 Rotation P07.09 Function codes speed Default Modif value y 1.00 ○ 100.0% ○ 1.0% ○ 0.1~999.9% Mechanical rotation speed =120*displayed running coefficient frequency×P07.09/motor pole pairs P07.10 Linear speed 0.1~999.9% coefficient Linear speed= Mechanical rotation speed×P07.10 Rectifier P07.11 bridge -20.0~120.0℃ ● -20.0~120.0℃ ● 1.00~655.35 ● module temperature Converter P07.12 module temperature P07.13 Software version Local ● P07.14 accumulative 0~65535h running time High bit of P07.15 power consumption Low bit of P07.16 power Display the power used by the inverter. ● The power consumption of the inverter =P07.15*1000+P07.16 Setting range of P07.15: 0~65535°(*1000) Setting range of P07.16: 0.0~999.9° ● consumption P07.17 ● Reserved Reserved The rated ● P07.18 power of the 0.4~3000.0kW inverter P07.19 The rated voltage of ● 50~1200V 95 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y the inverter The rated ● P07.20 current of the 0.1~6000.0A inverter P07.21 Factory bar 0x0000~0xFFFF ● 0x0000~0xFFFF ● 0x0000~0xFFFF ● 0x0000~0xFFFF ● 0x0000~0xFFFF ● 0x0000~0xFFFF ● code 1 P07.22 Factory bar code 2 P07.23 P07.24 P07.25 P07.26 Factory bar code 3 Factory bar code 4 Factory bar code 5 Factory bar code 6 0:No fault 1:IGBT U phase protection(OUt1) 2:IGBT V phase protection(OUt2) 3:IGBT W phase protection(OUt3) 4:OC1 P07.27 Current fault type ● 5:OC2 6:OC3 7:OV1 8:OV2 9:OV3 10:UV 96 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 11:Motor overload(OL1) 12:The inverter overload(OL2) 13:Input side phase loss(SPI) 14:Output side phase loss(SPO) P07.28 Previous 15:Overheat of the rectifier module(OH1) fault type 16:Overheat fault of the inverter module(OH2) ● 17:External fault(EF) 18:485 communication fault(CE) 19:Current detection fault(ItE) 20:Motor antotune fault(tE) P07.29 P07.30 P07.31 Previous 2 21:EEPROM operation fault(EEP) fault type ● 22:PID response offline fault(PIDE) Previous 3 23:Braking unit fault(bCE) fault type ● 24:Running time arrival(END) Previous 4 25:Electrical overload(OL3) fault type ● 26:Panel communication fault(PCE) 27:Parameter uploading fault (UPE) 28:Parameter downloading fault(DNE) 29:Profibus communication fault(E-DP) 30:Ethernet communication fault(E-NET) P07.32 Previous 5 31:CAN communication fault(E-CAN) fault type ● 32:Grounding short circuit fault 1(ETH1) 33:Grounding short circuit fault 2(ETH2) 34:Speed deviation fault(dEu) 35:Maladjustment(STu) 36: Undervoltage fault(LL) Running P07.33 frequency at 0.00Hz current fault Ramp P07.34 reference 0.00Hz frequency at 97 ● Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y current fault Output P07.35 voltage at 0V the current fault Output P07.36 0.0A current at current fault Bus voltage P07.37 at current 0.0V fault The Max. P07.38 temperature 0.0℃ at current fault Input P07.39 terminals 0 ● 0 ● 0.00Hz ● 0.00Hz ● 0V ● state at current fault Output P07.40 terminals state at current fault Running P07.41 frequency at previous fault Ramp P07.42 reference frequency at previous fault P07.43 Output 98 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0A ● 0.0V ● 0.0℃ ● 0 ● 0 ● 0.00Hz ● 0.00Hz ● 0V ● voltage at previous fault The output P07.44 current at previous fault Bus voltage P07.45 at previous fault The Max. P07.46 temperature at previous fault Input P07.47 terminals state at previous fault Output P07.48 terminals state at previous fault Runnig P07.49 frequency at previous 2 fault Output P07.50 voltage at previous 2 faults Output P07.51 current at previous 2 99 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0A ● 0.0V ● 0.0℃ ● 0 ● 0 ● faults Output P07.52 current at previous 2 fault Bus voltage P07.53 at previous 2 fault The Max. P07.54 temperature at previous 2 fault Input terminals P07.55 state at previous 2 fault Output terminals P07.56 state at previous 2 fault P08 Group Enhanced function See P00.11 and P00.12 for detailed definition. P08.00 P08.01 ACC time 2 Goodrive300 series define four groups of ACC/DEC Depend on time which can be selected by P5 group. The first model group of ACC/DEC time is the factory default one. Depend DEC time 2 Setting range:0.0~3600.0s on ○ ○ model P08.02 ACC time 3 Depend 100 on ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y model Depend P08.03 DEC time 3 on ○ model Depend P08.04 ACC time 4 on ○ model Depend P08.05 DEC time 4 on ○ model P08.06 Jogging frequency P08.07 Jogging ACC time This parameter is used to define the reference frequency during jogging. P08.09 Jogging DEC time Jumping inverter runs from 0Hz to the Max. Frequency. The jogging DEC time means the time needed if the P08.10 P08.11 0Hz. on When the set frequency is in the range of jumping ○ model Depend on Setting range:0.0~3600.0s frequency 1 frequency, the inverter will run at the edge of the Jumping ○ The jogging ACC time means the time needed if the Depend inverter goes from the Max. Frequency (P0.03) to P08.08 5.00Hz Setting range: 0.00Hz ~P00.03(the Max. frequency) ○ model 0.00Hz ○ 0.00Hz ○ 0.00Hz ○ 0.00Hz ○ 0.00Hz ○ jumping frequency. frequency The inverter can avoid the mechanical resonance range 1 point by setting the jumping frequency. The inverter Jumping can set three jumping frequency. But this function frequency 2 will be invalid if all jumping points are 0. Jumping P08.12 frequency range 2 P08.13 Jumping frequency 3 101 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.00Hz ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0% ○ 5.0s ○ 5.0s ○ Jumping P08.14 frequency range 3 Setting range: 0.00~P00.03(the Max. frequency) P08.15 P08.16 Traverse This function applies to the industries where traverse range and convolution function are required such as textile Sudden and chemical fiber. jumping The traverse function means that the output frequency frequency of the inverter is fluctuated with the set range P08.17 Traverse frequency as its center. The route of the running frequency is illustrated as below, of which the boost time traverse is set by P08.15 and when P08.15 is set as 0, the traverse is 0 with no function. Traverse P08.18 declining time Traverse range:The traverse running is limited by upper and low frequency. The traverse range relative to the center frequency: traverse range AW=center frequency×traverse range P08.15. Sudden jumping frequency=traverse range AW× sudden jumping frequency range P08.16. When run at the traverse frequency, the value which is relative 102 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0m ○ 0m ● 1 ○ to the sudden jumping frequency. The raising time of the traverse frequency:The time from the lowest point to the highest one. The declining time of the traverse frequency :The time from the highest point to the lowest one. The setting range of P08.15: 0.0~100.0%(relative to the set frequency) The setting range of P08.16: 0.0~50.0%(relative to the traverse range) The setting range of P08.17: 0.1~3600.0s The setting range of P08.18: 0.1~3600.0s P08.19 Setting The function codes of setting length, actual length length and unit pulse are mainly used to control the fixed P08.20 Actual length length. P08.21 P08.22 Pulse per The length is counted by the pulse signal of HDI rotation Alxe terminals input and the HDI terminals are needed to set as the length counting input. perimeter Actual length=the length counting input pulse /unit P08.23 Length ratio pulse When the actual length P08.20 exceeds the setting 10.00c ○ m 1.000 ○ 1.000 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ length P08.19, the multi-function digital output terminals will output ON. Length P08.24 Setting range of P08.19: 0~65535m correcting Setting range of P08.20:0~65535m coefficient Setting range of P08.21:1~10000 Setting range of P08.22:0.01~100.00cm Setting range of P08.23:0.001~10.000 Setting range of P08.24:0.001~1.000 Setting P08.25 counting value P08.26 The counter works by the input pulse signals of the HDI terminals. When the counter achieves a fixed number, the Reference multi-function output terminals will output the signal 103 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters counting of “fixed counting number arrival” and the counter go value Default Modif value y 0m ○ 0 ○ 1.0s ○ 0.00Hz ○ on working; when the counter achieves a setting number, the multi-function output terminals will output the signal of “setting counting number arrival”, the counter will clear all numbers and stop to recount before the next pulse. The setting counting value P08.26 should be no more than the setting counting value P08.25. The function is illustrated as below: Setting range of P08.25:P08.26~65535 Setting range of P08.26:0~P08.25 Pre-set running time of the inverter. When the Set running P08.27 time accumulative running time achieves the set time, the multi-function digital output terminals will output the signal of “running time arrival”. Setting range:0~65535m P08.28 Fault reset The time of the fault reset: the inverter set the fault times reset time by selecting this function. If the reset time exceeds this set value, the inverter will stop for the fault and wait to be repaired. Interval time The interval time of the fault reset: the interval P08.29 of automatic between the time when the fault occurs and the time fault reset when the reset action occurs. Setting range of P08.28:0~10 Setting range of P08.29:0.1~3600.0s Frequency The output frequency of the inverter changes as the P08.30 decreasing load. And it is mainly used to balance the power ratio of the when several inverters drive one load. 104 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name dropping Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ◎ Setting range:0.00~50.00Hz control Goodrive300 supports the shift between two motors. This function is used to select the shifting channel. LED ones: shifting channel The shifting channel P08.31 between motor 1 and motor 2 0: terminal shifting; digital terminal is 35 1: MODBUS communication shifting 2: PROFIBUS communication shifting 3: Ethernet communication shifting 4: CAN communication shifting LED tens: shifting enabling in operation 0: Disabled 1: Enabled 0x00~0x14 FDT1 P08.32 corresponding frequency of FDT electrical level, the level multi-function digital output terminals will output the detection P08.33 When the output frequency exceeds the electrical 50.00H ○ z signal of “frequency level detect FDT” until the output value frequency decreases to a value lower than (FDT FDT1 electrical level—FDT retention detection value) the retention corresponding frequency, the signal is invalid. Below detection is the ware form diagram: 5.0% ○ value FDT2 electrical P08.34 50.00H level ○ z detection value FDT2 P08.35 retention detection 5.0% Setting range of P08.32: 0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max. 105 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name value Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.00Hz ○ 0 ○ frequency) Setting range of P08.33: 0.0~100.0%(FDT1 electrical level) Setting range of P08.34: 0.00~P00.03(the Max. frequency) Setting range of P08.35: 0.0~100.0%(FDT2 electrical level) When the output frequency is among the below or above the range of the set frequency, the multi-function digital output terminal will output the signal of “frequency arrival”, see the diagram below for detailed information: Frequency P08.36 arrival detection value The setting range:0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) This parameter is used to control the internal braking P08.37 Energy pipe inside the inverter. braking 0:Disable enable 1:Enable Note:Only applied to internal braking pipe. Threshold P08.38 voltage After set the original bus voltage to brake the 220V energy, brake the load by adjusting the voltage voltage:3 appropriately. The factory changes with voltage 80.0V 106 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters level. Default Modif value y 380V The setting range:200.0~2000.0V voltage:7 00.0V 660V voltage:1 120.0V Cooling fan P08.39 running 0:Rated running mode 1:The fan keeps on running after power on 0 ○ mode LED ones: PWM mode selection ◎ 0: PWM mode 1, three-phase modulation and two-modulation 1: PWM mode 2, three-phase modulation LED tens: low-speed carrier frequency limit mode PWM P08.40 selection 0: Low-speed carrier frequency limit mode 1, the carrier frequency will limit to 2k if it exceeds 2k at low 01 speed 1:Low-speed carrier frequency limit mode 2, the carrier frequency will limit to 4k if it exceeds 4k at low speed 2: No limit Over P08.41 commission 0:Invalid 1:Valid 1 ◎ 0x0000 ○ selection 0x000~0x1223 LED ones:frequency enable selection 0:Both ∧/∨ keys and digital potentiometer P08.42 Keypad data adjustments are effective control 1:Only ∧/∨ keys adjustments is effective 2:Only digital potentiometer adjustments is effective 3:Neither ∧/∨ keys nor digital potentiometer adjustments are effective 107 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.10s ○ 0x000 ○ LED tens: frequency control selection 0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0 1:Effective for all frequency setting manner 2:Ineffective for multi-stage speed when multi-stage speed has the priority LED hundreds: action selection during stopping 0:Setting is valid 1:Valid during running, cleared after stopping 2:Valid during running, cleared after receiving the stop command LED thousands: ∧/∨ keys and digital potentiometer Integral function 0:The Integral function is valid 1:The Integral function is invalid Keypad data P08.43 potentiomete r integral 0.01~10.00s ratio 0x00~0x221 LED ones: frequency control selection 0:UP/DOWN terminals setting effective 1:UP/DOWN terminals setting ineffective LED tens: frequency control selection UP/DOWN P08.44 terminals control 0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0 1:All frequency means are effective 2:When the multi-stage are priority, it is ineffective to the multi-stage LED hundreds: action selection when stop 0:Setting effective 1:Effective in the running, clear after stop 2:Effective in the running, clear after receiving the stop commands 108 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y UP terminals P08.45 frequency changing 0.50 0.01~50.00Hz/s ○ Hz/s ratio DOWN terminals P08.46 0.50 frequency 0.01~50.00 Hz/s ○ Hz/s changing ratio 0x000~0x111 LED ones:The action selection when the digital adjusting the frequency is off. 0:Save when the power is off Action when the P08.47 frequency setting is off 1:Clear when the power is off LED tens:The action selection when MODBUS set frequency is off 0x000 ○ 0° ○ 0.0° ○ 0 ● 0:Save when the power is off 1:Clear when the power is off LED hundreds:The action selection when the other frequency set frequency is off 0:Save when the power is off 1:Clear when the power is off High bit of This parameter is used to set the original value of the P08.48 initial power power comsumotion. consumption The original value of the power comsumotion Low bit of =P08.48*1000+ P08.49 P08.49 initial power Setting range of P08.48: 0~59999°(k) consumption Setting range of P08.49:0.0~999.9° P08.50 Magnetic flux braking This function code is used to enable magnetic flux. 0: Invalid. 1: Valid. 109 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.56 ○ 0 ○ This inverter is used to increase the magnetic flux to decelerate the motor. The energy generated by the motor during braking can be converter into heat energy by increasing the magnetic flux. The inverter monitors the state of the motor continuously even during the magnetic flux period. So the magnetic flux can be used in the motor stop, as well as to change the rotation speed of the motor. Its other advantages are: Brake immediately after the stop command. It does not need to wait the magnetic flux weaken. The effect is better for signal cooling. The current of the stator other than the rotor increases during magnetic flux braking, while the cooling of the stator is more effective than the rotor. Input power This function code is used to adjust the displayed P08.51 factor of the current of the AC input side. inverter P09 Group Setting range:0.00~1.00 PID control When the frequency command selection (P00.06, P00. 07) is 7 or the voltage setting channel selection (P04.27) is 6, the running mode of the inverter is procedure PID controlled. The parameter determines the target given channel PID P09.00 during the PID procures. reference 0:Keypad digital given(P09.01) source 1:Analog channel AI1 given 2:Analog channel AI2 given 3:Analog channel AI3 set 4:High speed pulse HDI set 5:Multi-stage speed set 6:MODBUS communication set 110 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0% ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 7:PROFIBUS communication set 8:Ethernet communication set 9:CAN communication set The setting target of procedure PID is a relative one, 100% of the setting equals to 100% of the response of the controlled system. The system is calculated according to the relative value (0~100.0%). Note: Multi-stage speed given,it is realized by setting PA group parameters. PROFIBUS communication setting, Ethernet communication setting and CAN communication setting need more corresponding extension cards. P09.01 Keypad PID preset When P09.00=0,set the parameter whose basic value is the response value of the system. The setting range:-100.0%~100.0% Select the PID channel by the parameter. 0:Analog channel AI1 feedback 1:Analog channel AI2 feedback 2:Analog channel AI3 feedback PID P09.02 feedback source 3:High speed HDI feedback 4:MODBUS communication feedback 5:PROFIBUS communication feedback 6:Ethernet communication feedback 7:CAN communication feedback Note:The given channel and the feedback channel can not coincide, otherwise, PID can not control effectively. P09.03 PID output feature 0:PID output is positive:When the feedback signal exceeds the PID given value, the output frequency of the inverter will decrease to balance the PID. For 111 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 1.00 ○ 0.10s ○ 0.00s ○ example, the strain PID control during wrapup 1:PID output is negative:When the feedback signal is stronger than the PID given value, the output frequency of the inverter will increase to balance the PID. For example, the strain PID control during wrapdown The function is applied to the proportional gain P of PID input. P determines the strength of the whole PID adjuster. P09.04 Proportional The parameter of 100 means that when the offset of gain (Kp) PID feedback and given value is 100%, the adjusting range of PID adjustor is the Max. Frequency (ignoring integral function and differential function). The setting range:0.00~100.00 This parameter determines the speed of PID adjustor to carry out integral adjustment on the deviation of PID feedback and reference. When the deviation of PID feedback and reference is P09.05 Intergal 100%, the integral adjustor works continuously after time(Ti) the time (ignoring the proportional effect and differential effect) to achieve the Max. Frequency (P00.03) or the Max. Voltage (P04.31). Shorter the integral time, stronger is the adjustment Setting range: 0.00~10.00s This parameter determines the strength of th e change ratio when PID adjustor carries out integral adjustment on the deviation of PID feedback and P09.06 Differential reference. time(Td) If the PID feedback changes 100% during the time, the adjustment of integral adjustor (ignoring the proportional effect and differential effect) is the Max. Frequency (P00.03) or the Max. Voltage (P04.31). 112 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.10s ○ 0.0% ○ 100.0% ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0% ○ Longer the integral time, stronger is the adjusting. Setting range: 0.01~10.00s This parameter means the sampling cycle of the Sampling P09.07 cycle(T) feedback. The adjustor operates each sampling cycle. The longer the sapling cycle is, the slower the response is. Setting range: 0.00~100.00s The output of PID system is the maximum deviation relative to close loop reference. As shown in the diagram below, PID adjustor stops to work during the deviation limit. Set the function properly to adjust the accuracy and stability of the system. PID control P09.08 deviation limit Setting range:0.0~100.0% P09.09 Output upper This parameter is used to set the upper and lower limit of PID limit of the PID adjustor output. 100.0 % corresponds to Max. Frequency or the Max. Output lower Voltage of ( P04.31) P09.10 limit of PID Setting range of P09.09: P09.10~100.0% Setting range of P09.10: -100.0%~P09.09 Set the PID feedback offline detection value, when P09.11 Feedback offline detection the detection value is smaller than or equals to the feedback offline detection value, and the lasting time 113 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name value Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 1.0s ○ 0x00 ○ exceeds the set value in P09.12, the inverter will report “PID feedback offline fault” and the keypad will display PIDE. Feedback P09.12 offline detection time Setting range of P09.11: 0.0~100.0% Setting range of P09.12: 0.0~3600.0s 0x00~0x11 LED ones: 0:Keep on integral adjustment when the frequency achieves the upper and low limit;the integration shows the change between the reference and the feedback unless it reaches the internal integral limit. When the trend between the reference and the feedback changes, it needs more time to offset the impact of continuous working and the integration will P09.13 PID change with the trend. adjustment 1:Stop integral adjustment when the frequency achieves the upper and low limit. If the integration keeps stable, and the trend between the reference and the feedback changes, the integration will change with the trend quickly. LED tens: 0:The same with the setting direction; if the output of PID adjustment is different from the current running direction, the internal will output 0 forcedly. 1:Opposite to the setting direction 114 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y P09.14 Reserved ● P09.15 Reserved ● P09.16 Reserved ● P10 Group Simple PLC and multi-stage speed control 0:Stop after running once. The inverter has to be commanded again after finishing a cycle. 1:Run at the final value after running once. After P10.00 Simple PLC finish a signal, the inverter will keep the running frequency and direction of the last run. 0 ○ 0 ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 2:Cycle running. The inverter will keep on running until receiving a stop command d. And then, the system will stop. P10.01 P10.02 Simple PLC memory 0: Power loss without memory 1:Power loss memory;PLC record the running stage and frequency when power loss. Multi-step The frequency setting range of stage 0~15: speed 0 -100.0~100.0%,100.0% of the frequency setting The running corresponds to the Max. Frequency P00.03. P10.03 time of step The operation time setting of stage 0~15: the time 0 P10.04 P10.05 P10.06 unit is determined by P10.37. When selecting simple Multi-step PLC running, set P10.02~P10.33 to define the speed 1 running frequency and time of all stages. The running Note:The symbol of multi-stage determines the time of step 1 running direction of simple PLC. The negative value Multi-step means reverse rotation. speed 2 P10.07 The running time of step 2 P10.08 P10.09 Multi-step speed 3 The running time of step 3 115 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P10.10 P10.11 Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Multi-step speed 4 The running Default Modif value y 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ time of step 4 P10.12 Multi-step speed 5 P10.13 P10.14 P10.15 P10.16 The running time of step 5 Multi-step speed 6 The running time of step 6 Multi-step speed 7 P10.17 The running time of step 7 P10.18 P10.19 Multi-step speed 8 The running time of step 8 If multi-stage speed operation is selected, multi-stage speeds are in the range of --fmax~fmax and it can be set continuously. Goodrive300 series inverters can set 16 stages speed, selected by the combination of multi-stage terminals 1~4(select the setting by S terminals, the corresponding function codes are P05.01~P05.09), P10.20 P10.21 Multi-step corresponding to the speed 1 to speed 15. speed 9 The running time of step 9 P10.22 Multi-step speed 10 The running P10.23 time of step 10 P10.24 Multi-step speed 11 116 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Default Modif Detailed instruction of parameters value y 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ 0x0000 ○ The running P10.25 time of step 11 P10.26 Multi-step speed 12 The running P10.27 time of step 12 P10.28 Multi-step speed 13 The running When terminal 1, terminal 2, terminal 3, terminal P10.29 time of step 4=OFF, the frequency input manner is selected via 13 P10.30 Multi-step terminal 3, terminal 4 aren’t off, it runs at multi-stage speed 14 which takes precedence of keypad, analog value, The running P10.31 time of step 14 P10.32 code P00.06 or P00.07. When terminal 1, terminal 2, Multi-step speed 15 high-speed pulse, PLC, communication frequency input. The relationship between terminal 1, terminal 2, terminal 3, terminal 4 and multi-stage speed is as following: Terminal 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Terminal 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON Terminal 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Terminal 4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF The running P10.33 time of step 15 stage 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Terminal 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Terminal 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON Terminal 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON Terminal 4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Stage P10.34 Simple PLC 8 9 10 11 12 Below is the detailed instruction: 117 13 14 15 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Default Modif Detailed instruction of parameters 0~7 step Function ACC/DEC code value y 0x0000 ○ 0 ◎ Stag ACC/DE ACC/DE ACC/DE ACC/DE Binary bit time e C0 C1 C2 C3 BIT1 BIT0 0 00 01 10 11 BIT3 BIT2 1 00 01 10 11 BIT5 BIT4 2 00 01 10 11 BIT7 BIT6 3 00 01 10 11 BIT9 P10.34 Simple PLC P10.35 8~15 step ACC/DEC time BIT8 4 00 01 10 11 BIT11 BIT10 5 00 01 10 11 BIT13 BIT12 6 00 01 10 11 BIT15 BIT14 7 00 01 10 11 BIT1 BIT0 8 00 01 10 11 BIT3 BIT2 9 00 01 10 11 BIT5 BIT4 10 00 01 10 11 BIT7 BIT6 11 00 01 10 11 BIT9 BIT8 12 00 01 10 11 BIT11 BIT10 13 00 01 10 11 BIT13 BIT12 14 00 01 10 11 BIT15 BIT14 15 00 01 10 11 P10.35 After the users select the corresponding ACC/DEC time, the combining 16 binary bit will change into Hexadecimal bit, and then set the corresponding function codes. ACC/DEC time 1 is aet by P00.11 and P00.12; ACC/DEC time 2 is aet by P08.00 and P08.01; ACC/DEC time 3 is aet by P08.02 and P08.03; ACC/DEC time 4 is aet by P08.04 and P08.05. Setting range: -0x0000~0xFFFF 0:Restart from the first stage; stop during running (cause by the stop command, fault or power loss), P10.36 PLC restart run from the first stage after restart. 1: Continue to run from the stop frequency; stop during running(cause by stop command and fault), 118 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Function codes Name n code Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0 ◎ 11 ○ 0 ○ the inverter will record the running time automatically, enter into the stage after restart and keep the remaining running at the setting frequency. 0: Seconds;the running time of all stages is counted P10.37 Multi-step by second time unit 1: Minutes;the running time of all stages is counted by minute P11 Group Protective parameters 0x00~0x11 LED ones: P11.00 Phase loss protection 0: Input phase loss protection disable 1: Input phase loss protection enable LED tens: 0: Input phase loss protection disable 1: Input phase loss protection enable Sudden P11.01 power loss 0: Enable frequency-de 1: Disable creasing Setting range: 0.00Hz/s~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) After the power loss of the grid, the bus voltage drops to the sudden frequency-decreasing point, the inverter begin to decrease the running frequency at Frequency P11.02, to make the inverter generate power again. decreasing The returning power can maintain the bus voltage to P11.02 ratio of ensure a rated running of the inverter until the sudden recovery of power. Voltage degree power loss z/s 220V 380V 660V 260V 460V 800V frequency-decre asing point of sudden power 10.00H loss Note: 119 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 1 ○ 1. Adjust the parameter properly to avoid the stopping caused by inverter protection during the switching of the grid. 2. Prohibition of input phase protection can enable this function. 0:Disable 1:Enable Overvoltage P11.03 speed loss protection Overvoltage 120~150%(standard bus voltage)( 230V) P11.04 120% speed loss 120~150%(standard bus voltage)(400V) 140% protection 120~150%(standard bus voltage)( 690V) 120% voltage ○ Current limit The actual increasing ratio is higher than the ratio of P11.05 action selection output frequency because of the big load during 1 ◎ 160.0% ◎ ACC running. It is necessary to take measures to avoid overcurrent fault and the inverter trips. P11.06 Automatic During the running of the inverter, this function will current limit detect the output current and compare it with the limit level defined in P11.06. If it exceeds the level, the inverter will run at stable frequency in ACC running, The P11.07 or the inverter will derate to run during the constant decreasing running. If it exceeds the level continuously, the 10.00H ratio during output frequency will keep on decreasing to the z/s current limit lower limit. If the output current is detected to be lower than the limit level, the inverter will accelerate 120 ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0x000 ○ 150% ○ 1.0s ○ to run. Setting range of P11.05: 0:current limit invalid 1:current limit valid 2:current limit is invalid during constant speed Setting range of P11.06:50.0~200.0% Setting range of P11.07:0.00~50.00Hz/s Overload The output current of the inverter or the motor is pre-alarm of above P11.09 and the lasting time is beyond P11.10, P11.08 the overload pre-alarm will be output. motor/inverte r Overload P11.09 pre-alarm test level Overload P11.10 Setting range of P11.08: pre-alarm Enable and define the overload pre-alarm of the detection inverter or the motor. time Setting range: 0x000~0x131 LED ones: 0:Overload pre-alarm of the motor, comply with the 121 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 50% ○ 1.0s ○ 0x00 ○ rated current of the motor 1:Overload pre-alarm of the inverter, comply with the rated current of the inverter LED tens: 0:The inverter continues to work after underload pre-alarm 1:The inverter continues to work after underload pre-alarm and the inverter stops to run after overload fault 2: The inverter continues to work after overload pre-alarm and the inverter stops to run after underload fault LED hundreds : 0:Detection all the time 1:Detection in constant running Setting range of P11.09: P11.11~200% Setting range of P11.10: 0.1~3600.0s Detection P11.11 level of the underload pre-alarm Detection P11.12 time of the If the inverter current or the output current is lower than P11.11, and its lasting time is beyond P11.12, the inverter will output underload pre-alarm. Setting range of P11.11: 0~P11.09 Setting range of P11.12: 0.1~3600.0s underload pre-alarm Select the action of fault output terminals on undervoltage and fault reset. P11.13 Output 0x00~0x11 terminal LED ones: action during 0:Action under fault undervoltage fault 1:No action under fault undervoltage LED tens: 0:Action during the automatic reset 122 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 10.0% ● 0.5s ○ 0 ◎ 1:No action during the automatic reset Speed P11.14 deviation detection 0.0~50.0% Set the speed deviation detection time. This parameter is used to see the speed deviation detection time. Speed P11.15 deviation detection time Setting range of P11.08: 0.0~10.0s P11.16 Reserved P12 Group Motor 2 0:Asynchronous motor P12.00 Motor type 2 1:Synchronous motor Note: switch the current motor by the switching channel of P08.31. Asynchronou P12.01 P12.02 Set the parameter of s motor 2 0.1~3000.0kW the controlled rated power asynchronous motor. Asynchronou In order to ensure the s motor 2 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. rated controlling performance, set the frequency) Depend on ◎ model 50.00H ◎ z P12.01~P12.05 frequency according to the name plate of the P12.03 Asynchronou 1~36000rpm s motor 2 rated rotation asynchronous motor. 123 Depend on model ◎ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters speed s motor 2 value y CHE series inverters provide the function of Asynchronou P12.04 Default Modif parameter autotuning. 0~1200V rated Correct parameter voltage autotuning comes Depend on ◎ model from the correct setting of the motor name plate. In order to ensure the controlling performance, please configure the motor according to the Asynchronou P12.05 s motor 2 0.8~6000.0A rated standard principles, if Depend the gap between the on motor and the current ◎ model standard one is huge, the features of the inverter will decrease. Note:reset the rated power of the motor(P12.01),initializ e the motor parameter of P12.02~P12.05 P12.06 P12.07 Asynchronou After finish the motor s motor 2 parameter autotuning, rotor 0.001~65.535Ω the set value of resistance P12.06~P12.10 will Asynchronou renew automatically. s motor 2 These parameters are 0.001~65.535Ω basic parameters stator controlled by vectors resistance 124 Depend on ○ model Depend on model ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Asynchronou P12.08 which directly impact s motor 2 0.1~655.35mH the features. leakage Note: Users cannot P12.09 mutual value y Depend on ○ model modify the parameters Asynchronou s motor 2 Default Modif freely. 0.1~655.35mH Depend on ○ model induction Asynchronou P12.10 s motor 2 Depend 0.1~6553.5A on noload ○ model current Magnetic saturation P12.11 coefficient 1 0.0~100.0% 80.0% ◎ 68.0% ◎ 57.0% ◎ 40.0% ◎ for the iron core of AM2 Magnetic saturation P12.12 coefficient 2 0.0~100.0% for the iron core of AM2 Magnetic saturation P12.13 coefficient 3 0.0~100.0% for the iron core of AM2 Magnetic saturation P12.14 coefficient 4 0.0~100.0% for the iron core of AM2 125 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Synchronous Set the parameter of P12.15 motor 2 rated 0.1~3000.0kW the controlled power Synchronous P12.16 motor 2 rated frequency asynchronous motor. motor 2 value y Depend on ◎ model In order to ensure the 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) controlling performance, set the 50.00H ◎ z P12.151~P12.19 Synchronous P12.17 Default Modif according to the name 1~50 2 ◎ plate of the pority pairs Synchronous asynchronous motor. P12.18 motor 2 rated 0~1200V CHE series inverters Depend on voltage provide the function of model Synchronous parameter autotuning. Depend P12.19 motor 2 rated 0.8~6000.0A current Correct parameter on autotuning comes model ◎ ◎ from the correct setting of the motor name plate. In order to ensure the controlling performance, please configure the motor according to the Synchronous P12.20 motor 2 rotor 0.001~65.535Ω resistance on the gap between the model motor and the standard one is huge, the features of the inverter will decrease. Note:reset the rated power of the motor(P12.15),initializ 126 Depend standard principles, if ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Function codes Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y e the motor parameter of P12.16~ P12.19. Synchronous P12.21 motor 2 d-axis Depend 0.1~6553.5mH inductor motor 2 quadrature 0.1~6553.5mH value of P12.23 cannot be updated by autotuning, please count according to the following method. force constant can be parameters on the name Synchronous plate of the motor. There are three ways to count: on ○ model controlled by vectors which directly impact the features. When P00.15=1, the can be updated automatically, and there is no need to change the value of P12.23; when counter-elect 1. If the name plate force Depend renew automatically. through autotuning counted according to the constant P12.20~P12.22 will set value of P12.23 The counter-electromotive romotive ○ basic parameters When P00.15=2, the set P12.23 parameter autotuning, These parameters are axis inductor motor 2 on model the set value of Synchronous P12.22 After finish the motor P00.15=2, the set designate the value of P12.23 can counter-electromotive force constant Ke, then: not be updated through autotuning, E=(Ke*nN*2π)/ 60 2. If the name plate please account and update the value of designate the P12.23. counter-electromotive force constant E’(V/1000r/min), then: Note:Users cannot modify the parameters freely. E=E’*nN/1000 3. Iif the name plate does not designate the above 127 300 ○ Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0x0000 ● 10% ● 2 ◎ 100.0% ○ parameters, then: E=P/√3*I In the above formulas: nN is the rated rotation speed, P is the rated power and I is the rated current. Setting range: 0~10000 Synchronous motor 2 P12.24 original magnetic 0~FFFFH (reserved) pority position Synchronous P12.25 motor 2 identification 0%~50%(the rated current of the motor)(reserved) current P12.26 Motor 2 0:No protection overload 1:Common motor(with low speed compensation) protection 2:Invertering motor(without low speed selection compensation) When P12.27=overload protection current of the motor/rated current of the motor So, the bigger the overload coefficient is, the shorter P12.27 Motor 2 the reporting time of the overload fault is. When the overload overload coefficient <110%, there is no overload protection coefficient protection. When the overload coefficient =116%, the fault will be reported after 1 hour, when the overload coefficient =200%, the fault will be reported after 1 minute. 128 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y Setting range: 20.0%~120.0% P12.28 ● Reserved 0: Display according to the motor type: only the Motor 2 P12.29 parameters relative to the current motor type are parameters displayed for the convenient for the customers in this display selection mode. 0 ● 80.0% ◎ 0 ◎ 20.0% ○ 10.0% ○ 1: All parameters are displayed: all parameters are displayed in this mode. P13 Group Synchronous motor control Reduction P13.00 factor of source 0.0~100.0% current Original P13.01 0: No test pority test 1: High-frequency superposition (reserved) means 2: Pulse superposition Source current is directional current of the magnetic pole position. Source current 1 is effective under the P13.02 Source frequency point of current shifting. Please increase current 1 the value is the starting torque should be modified. Setting range;0.0%~100.0% (rated current of the motor) P13.03 Source Source current is directional current of the magnetic current 2 pole position. Source current 2 is effective under the 129 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y frequency point of current shifting. There is no need to modify the value generally. Setting range: 0.0%~100.0%(rated current of the motor) Shift P13.04 frequency of source current Valid frequency shifting point between source current 1 and current 2. Setting range: 0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 10.00 ○ Hz Superposing P13.05 frequency 200~1000Hz 500Hz ◎ 40.0% ◎ (reserved) P13.06 Pulse superpositio 0.0~300.0%(rated voltage of the motor) n voltage P13.07 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○ P13.08 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○ P13.09 Reserved 0~655.35 2.00 ○ P13.10 Reserved 0~65535 0 ○ 0.5s ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0% ○ 0.0s ○ Maladjustme P13.11 nt detection time High P13.12 Adjust the response of anti-maladjustment. If the inertia of the load is bigger, this value may be bigger too, but the response will be slow. Setting range: 0.0~10.0s When the motor runs above the rated rotation speed, frequency the parameter is valid, if vibration occurs to the compensatio motor, please adjust the parameter. n coefficient Setting range: 0~100.0% Braking P13.13 When P01.00=0 during the starting of the inverter, current of set P13.14 to a non-zero value to enter the short short-circuit circuit braking. The braking When the running frequency is lower than P01.09 P13.14 retention during the stopping of the inverter, set 13.15 to a time before non-zero value to enter into stopping short circuited starting braking and then carry out the DC braking at the time 130 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code The braking P13.15 retention time when stopping P14 Group Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0s ○ 1 ○ 4 ○ 1 ○ set by P01.12 (refer to the instruction of P01.09~P01.12) . Setting range of P13.13: 0.0~150.0%(the inverter) Setting range of P13.14: 0.0~50.0s Setting range of P13.15: 0.0~50.0s Serial communication The setting range:1~247 When the master is writing the frame, the communication address of the slave is set to 0; the address is the communication address. All slaves on Local the MODBUS fieldbus can receive the frame, but the P14.00 communicati salve doesn’t answer. address The communication of the drive is unique in the communication net. This is the fundamental for the point to point communication between the upper monitor and the drive. Note:The address of the slave cannot set to 0. Set the digital transmission speed between the upper monitor and the inverter. 0:1200BPS 1:2400BPS 2:4800BPS 3:9600BPS P14.01 Communicati 4:19200BPS baud ratio 5:38400BPS 6:57600BPS 7:115200BPS Note:The baud rate between the upper monitor and the inverter must be the same. Otherwise, the communication is not applied. The bigger the baud rate, the quicker the communication speed. P14.02 Digital bit checkout The data format between the upper monitor and the inverter must be the same. Otherwise, the communication is not applied. 131 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 5 ○ 0.0s ○ 0 ○ 0x00 ○ 0: No check (N,8,1)for RTU 1:Odd check (E,8,1)for RTU 2:Even check (O,8,1)for RTU 3:No check (N,8,2)for RTU 4: Odd check (E,8,2)for RTU 5:Even check(O,8,2)for RTU 0~200ms Mean the interval time when the drive receive the data and sent it to the upper monitor. If the answer P14.03 Answer delay delay is shorter than the system processing time, then the answer delay time is the system processing time, if the answer delay is longer than the system processing time, then after the system deal with the data, waits until achieving the answer delay time to send the data to the upper monitor. 0.0(invalid),0.1~60.0s When the function code is set as 0.0, the communication overtime parameter is invalid. Fault time of P14.04 communicati on overtime When the function code is set as non-zero, if the interval time between two communications exceeds the communication overtime, the system will report “485 communication faults” (CE). Generally, set it as invalid; set the parameter in the continuous communication to monitor the communication state. 0:Alarm and stop freely Transmissio P14.05 n fault processing 1:No alarm and continue to run 2:No alarm and stop according to the stop means(only under the communication control) 3:No alarm and stop according to the stop means(under all control modes) Communicati 0x00~0x11 P14.06 on LED ones: processing 0:Operation with response: the drive will respond to 132 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y all reading and writing commands of the upper monitor. 1:Operation without response;The drive only responds to the reading command other than the writing command of the drive. The communication efficiency can be increased by this method. LED tens:(reserved) P14.07 Reserved ● P14.08 Reserved ● P15 Group Profibus function P15.00 Module type 0:Profibus Select communication protocol 0 ◎ 2 ◎ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0~127 This function code is used to designate the address P15.01 Module address of the inverter. Note:0 is the broadcast address,when set it as broadcast address, only receive the radio command of the upper monitor other than answering the upper monitor. P15.02 P15.03 P15.04 P15.05 P15.06 P15.07 P15.08 PZD2 0:Invalid Receiving 1:Set frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz)) PZD3 2:Given PID, range(0~1000,1000 corresponds to Receiving 100.0%) PZD4 3:PID feedback, range(0~1000,1000 corresponds Receiving to 100.0%) PZD5 4:Torque set value(-3000~3000,1000 corresponds to Receiving 100.0% the rated current of the motor) 5:Set value of the forward rotation upper-limit PZD6 Receiving frequency(0~Fmax unit:0.01Hz)) 6:Set value of the reversed rotation upper-limit PZD7 frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz)) Receiving 7:Electromotion torque upper limit (0~3000,1000 PZD8 corresponds to 100.0%of the rated current of the Receiving 133 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P15.09 P15.10 P15.11 Name PZD9 Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters motor) Receiving 8:Braking torque upper limit (0~2000,1000 PZD10 value y 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ 0 ○ corresponds to 100.0% of the rated current of the Receiving motor) PZD11 Default Modif 9:Virtual input terminals command Receiving Range:0x000~0x1FF 10:Virtual output terminals command Range:0x00~0x0F 11:Voltage setting value(specialized for V/F separation )(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% P15.12 PZD12 Receiving the rated voltage of the motor) 12:AO output set value 1(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%) 13:AO output set value 2(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%) P15.13 P15.14 P15.15 P15.16 P15.17 P15.18 P15.19 P15.20 P15.21 P15.22 PZD2 sending PZD3 sending 0: Invalid 1: Running frequency(*100,Hz) 2: Set frequency(*100,Hz) 3: Bus voltage(*10,V) PZD4 4: Output voltage(*1,V) sending 5:Output current (*10,A) PZD5 6:Output torque actual value(*10,%) sending 7:Output power actual value(*10,%) PZD6 8:Running rotating speed(*1,RPM) sending PZD7 sending PZD8 sending PZD9 sending PZD10 sending PZD11 9:Running linear speed (*1,m/s) 10:Ramp given frequency 11:Fault code 12:AI1 value (*100,V) 13:AI2 value (*100,V) 14:AI3 value (*100,V) 15:PULSE frequency value (*100,kHz) 16:Terminals input state 17:Terminals output state 18:PID given(*100,%) 134 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code P15.23 Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters sending 19:PID feedback(*100,%) PZD12 20:Motor rated torque sending Default Modif value y 0 ○ 0 ○ 0.0s ○ 0 ● Temporarily P15.24 variable 1 for 0~65535 PZD sending 0.0(ineffective),0.1~60.0s DP P15.25 communicati on overtime downtime When this function code is set as 0.0, this function is ineffective. When the function code is set as nonzero value, if the internal time between two adjent communication exceeds the communication overtime, the system will report “PROFIBUS communication fault”(P-DP) . 0: 50k CAN 1: 125 k P15.26 communicati 2: 250 k on baud rate 3: 500 k 4: 1M P15.27 Reserved ● P15.28 Reserved ● P15.29 Reserved ● P16 Group Ethernet function 0:Self-adapting Speed 1:100M full duplex setting of the 2:100M semiduplex 3 ◎ P16.01 IP address 1 0~255 192 ◎ P16.02 IP address 2 Set the IP address of Ethernet communication The format of IP address:PA.09.PA.10.PA.11.PA.12. P16.03 IP address 3 168 ◎ 0 ◎ P16.00 Ethernet 3:10M full duplex communicati 4:10M semiduplex on The function code is used to set the Ethernet communication speed. 135 Goodrive300 inverters Functio Name n code Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters P16.04 IP address 4 For example:IP address is 192.168.0.1. Default Modif value y 1 ◎ ◎ P16.05 Subnet mask 255 1 0~255 P16.06 Subnet mask 2 P16.07 Subnet mask 3 ◎ Set the subnet mask of Ethernet communication. The format of 255 IP subnet mask:PA.13.PA.14.PA.15.PA.16. ◎ 255 For example:The mask is 255.255.255.0. ◎ P16.08 Subnet mask 0 4 P16.09 Gateway 1 192 ◎ P16.10 Gateway 2 0~255 168 ◎ P16.11 Gateway 3 Set the gateway of Ethernet communication 1 ◎ P16.12 Gateway 4 1 ◎ P16.13 Reserved ● P16.14 Reserved ● P17 Group P17.00 Monitoring function Set Display current set frequency of the inverter 0.00Hz ● 0.00Hz ● 0.00Hz ● 0V ● 0.0A ● 0 RPM ● 0.0A ● frequency Range: 0.00Hz~P00.03 P17.01 Output frequency Range: 0.00Hz~P00.03 Ramp P17.02 reference frequency P17.03 P17.04 Display current output frequency of the inverter Display current ramp given frequency of the inverter Range: 0.00Hz~P00.03 Output Display current output voltage of the inverter voltage Range: 0~1200V Output Display current output current of the inverter current Range: 0.0~5000.0A P17.05 Motor speed Display the rotation speed of the motor. Range: 0~65535RPM P17.06 Torque Display current torque current of the inverter current Range: 0~65535RPM 136 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P17.07 Name Reserved Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Display current magnetized current of the inverter Range: 0.0~5000.0A Default Modif value y 0.0A ● 0.0% ● 0.0% ● 0.00Hz ● 0V ● 0 ● 0 ● 0.00V ● 0.0% ● 0 ● 0 ● Display current power of the motor. P17.08 Motor power Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(the rated current of the motor) P17.09 Output Display the current output torque of the inverter. torque Range: -250.0~250.0% Evaluated Evaluate the motor rotor frequency on close loop P17.10 motor vector frequency Range: 0.00~ P00.03 P17.11 DC bus Display current DC bus voltage of the inverter voltage Range: 0.0~2000.0V ON-OFF P17.12 input terminals state ON-OFF P17.13 output terminals Display current Switch input terminals state of the inverter Range: 0000~00FF Display current Switch output terminals state of the inverter Range: 0000~000F state P17.14 Digital adjustment Display the adjustment through the keypad of the inverter. Range : 0.00Hz~P00.03 Display the torque given, the percentage to the P17.15 Torque current rated torque of the motor. reference Setting range: -300.0%~300.0%(the rated current of the motor) P17.16 Linear speed P17.17 Length Display the current linear speed of the inverter. Range: 0~65535 Display the current length of the inverter. Range: 0~65535 137 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P17.18 P17.19 Name Detailed instruction of parameters Counting Display the current counting number of the inverter. value AI1 input voltage P17.20 AI2 input voltage P17.21 P17.22 AI3 input voltage HDI input reference value PID P17.24 feedback value P17.25 P17.26 Range: 0~65535 Display analog AI1 input signal Display analog AI2 input signal value y 0 ● 0.00V ● 0.00V ● 0.00V ● Range: 0.00~10.00V Display analog AI2 input signal Range: -10.00~10.00V Display HDI input frequency Display PID given value Range: -100.0~100.0% Display PID response value Range: -100.0~100.0% Power factor Display the current power factor of the motor. of the motor Range: -1.00~1.00 Current Default Modif Range: 0.00~10.00V frequency Range: 0.00~50.00kHz PID P17.23 Function codes Display the current running time of the inverter. running time Range:0~65535min 0.00 ● kHz 0.0% ● 0.0% ● 0.0 ● 0m ● 0 ● 0.0% ● 0.0 ● Simple PLC and the P17.27 current step of the Display simple PLC and the current stage of the multi-stage speed Range: 0~15 multi-step speed ASR P17.28 controller output The percentage of the rated torque of the relative motor, display ASR controller output Range: -300.0%~300.0% (the rated current of the motor) P17.29 Synchronous Display synchronous motor Magnetic pole angle 138 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code Name motor Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Default Modif value y 0.0 ● 0.0 ● 0 ● 0 ● 0 ● 0 ● 0 ● 0 ● 0 ● Range: 0.0~360.0 Magnetic pole angle synchronous P17.30 motor phase Display synchronous motor phase compensation compensatio Range: -180.0~180.0 n synchronous motor P17.31 high-frequen cy Display synchronous motor high-frequency Superimposed current Range: 0.0%~200.0%(the rated current of the motor) Superimpose d current P17.32 Magnetic flux Display the magnetic flux linkage of the motor. linkage P17.33 Exciting current given P17.34 Torque current given P17.35 Range: 0.0%~200.0% Display the exciting current given in the vector control mode. Range: -3000.0~3000.0A Display the torque current given in the vector control mode. Range: -3000.0~3000.0A AC advance Display the value of advance wire current in AC side. wire current Range: 0.0~5000.0A Display the output torque. Positive value is in the P17.36 Output electromotion state, and negative is in the power torque generating state. Range : -3000.0Nm~3000.0Nm Count value P17.37 of motor 0~100(100 reports OL1 fault) overload P17.38 Reserved 139 Goodrive300 inverters Functio n code P17.39 Name Function codes Detailed instruction of parameters Reserved 140 Default Modif value y 0 ● Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Basic Operation Instruction 7 7.1 What this chapter contains This chapter describes the internal function mode of the inverter in details. Check all terminals are connected properly and tightly. Check that the power of the motor corresponds to that of the inverter. 7.2 First powering on Check before powering on Please check according to the installation list in chapter two. Original powering operation Check to ensure there is no mistake in wiring and power supply, switch on the air switch of the AC power supply on the input side of the inverter to power on the inverter. 8.8.8.8.8. will be displayed on the keypad, and the contactor closes normally. When the character on the nixie tubs changes to the set frequency, the inverter has finished the initialization and it is in the stand-by state. Below diagram shows the first operation: (take motor 1 as the example) 141 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction 142 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Note: If fault occurs, please do as the “Fault Tracking”. Esitimate the fault reason and settle the issue. Besides P00.01 and P00.02, terminal command setting can also used to set the running command channel. Current runnig Multi-function command terminal 36 channel Shifting the P00.01 command to keypad Multi-function Multi-function terminal 37 terminal 38 Shifting the Shifting the command to command to communication Keypad runnig command Terminal / runnig command channel channel communication Communication runnig command channel Terminal runnig command Keypad runnig command channel Communication / runnig channel command channel Communication runnig command Keypad runnig command channel Terminal runnig command channel / channel Note: “/” means the multi-function terminal is invalid on the current given channel. Relative parameters table: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying to AM,SM) P00.00 Speed control mode 1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 1 (applying to AM) 2:V/F control (applying to AM and SM) 0:Keypad running command channel(LED off) P00.01 Run command channel 1:Terminal running command channel (LED flickering) 2:Communication running command channel (LED on); 143 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:MODBUS communication channel Communication running 1:PROFIBUScommunication channel P00.02 commands channel 0 2:Ethernet communication channel selection 3:CAN communication channel 0:No operation Function parameter P00.18 1:Restore the default value 0 restore 2:Cancel the fault record 0:No operation Motor parameter 1:Rotation autotuning autotuning 2:Static autotuning 1 P00.15 0 3: Static autotuning 2 0:Asynchronous motor P02.00 Motor type 1 0 1:Synchronous motor Asynchronous motor 1 P02.01 Depend 0.1~3000.0kW rated power on model Asynchronous motor 1 P02.02 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz rated power Asynchronous motor 1 P02.03 Depend 1~36000rpm rated rotating speed on model Asynchronous motor 1 P02.04 Depend 0~1200V rated voltage on model Asynchronous motor 1 P02.05 Depend 0.8~6000.0A rated current on model Synchronous motor 1 P02.15 Depend 0.1~3000.0kW rated power on model Synchronous motor 1 P02.16 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz rated frequency Synchronous motor 1 P02.17 1~50 number of poles pairs 144 2 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Synchronous motor 1 Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0~1200V Depend P02.18 rated voltage P02.19 Synchronous motor 1 on model 0.8~6000.0A Depend rated current Multi-function digital input P05.01~P0 terminals 5.09 (S1~S8,HDI) function selection on model 36:Shift the command to the keypad 37:Shift the command to the terminals 38:Shift the command to the communication The function code determines the manner of parameters copy. 0:No operation 1:Upload the local function parameter to the keypad 2:Download P07.01 Function parameter copy the keypad function parameter to local address(including the motor parameters) 3:Download the keypad 0 function parameter to local address (excluding the motor parameter of P02, P12 group) 4:Download the keypad function parameters to local address (only for the motor parameter of P02,P12 group) 0:No function 1:Jogging running. Press QUICK/JOGto realizes the jogging running. 2:Shift the display state by the shifting P07.02 QUICK/JOG function selection key. Press QUICK/JOGto shift the displayed function code from right to left. 3:Shift between forwad rotations and reverse rotations. Press QUICK/JOG to shift the direction of the frequency commands. This function is only valid in 145 1 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value the keypad commands channels. 4:Clear UP/DOWN settings. Press QUICK/JOG to clear the set value of UP/DOWN. 5:Coast to stop. Press QUICK/JOG to coast to stop. 6:Shift the given manner of running commands. Press QUICK/JOG to shift the given manner of running commands. 7:Quick commission mode(committee according to the non-factory parameter) 7.3 Vector control Because asynchronous motors have the characteristics of high stage, nonlinear, strong coupling and various variables, the actual control of the asynchronous motor is very difficult. Vector control is mainly used to settle this problem with the theme of that divide the stator current vector into exciting current (the current heft generating internal magnetic field of the motor) and torque current (the current heft generating torque) by controlling and measuring the stator current vector according to the principles of beamed magnetic field to control the range and phase of these two hefts. This method can realize the decoupling of exciting current and torque current to adjust the high performance of asynchronous motors. Goodrive300 series inverters are embedded speedless sensor vector control calculation for driving both asynchronous motors and synchronous motors. Because the core calculation of vector control is based on exact motor parameter models, the accuracy of motor parameter will impact on the performance of vector control. It is recommended to input the motor parameters and carry out autotune before vector running. Because the vector control calculation is vary complicated, high technical theory is needed for the user during internal autotune. It is recommended to use the specific function parameters in vector control with cautions. 146 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying to AM,SM) P00.00 Speed control mode 1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 1 (applying to AM) 2:V/F control (applying to AM,SM) 0:No operation P00.15 Motor parameter 1:Rotation autotuning autotuning 2:Static autotuning 1 0 3: Static autotuning 2 P02.00 Motor type 1 0:Asynchronous motor 0 1:Synchronous motor P03.00 Speed loop proportional 0~200.0 20.0 gain1 P03.01 Speed loop integral time1 0.000~10.000s 0.200s P03.02 Low switching frequency 0.00Hz~P03.05 5.00Hz P03.03 Speed loop proportional 0~200.0 147 20.0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value gain 2 P03.04 Speed loop integral time 2 0.000~10.000s P03.05 High switching frequency P03.06 Speed output filter 0.200s P03.02~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 0~8( corresponds to 0~28/10ms) 10.00Hz 0 Vector control P03.07 electromotion slip 50%~200% 100% 50%~200% 100% 0~65535 1000 0~65535 1000 compensation coefficient P03.08 Vector control brake slip compensation coefficient P03.09 P03.10 Current loop percentage coeffient P Current loop integral coefficient 1 0:Torque control is invalid 1:Keypad setting torque(P03.12) 2:Analog AI1 setting torque 3:Analog AI2 setting torque 4:Analog AI3 setting torque 5:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque 6: Multi-stage torque setting P03.11 Torque setting method 7:MODBUS communication setting torque 8:PROFIBUS communication 0 setting torque 9:Ethernet communication setting torque 10:CAN communication setting torque Note: 100% of Setting methods 2~10, corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor. P03.12 Keypad setting torque P03.13 Torque given filter time -300.0%~300.0%(rated current of the motor) 0.000~10.000s 148 50.0% 0.100s Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.16) 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit AI2 setting upper-limit AI3 setting upper-limit frequency 2:Analog frequency 3:Analog frequency 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit Torque control forward P03.14 rotation upper-limit frequency setting saurce selection frequency 5:Multi-stages setting upper-limit frequency 6:MODBUS communication 0 setting upper-limit frequency 7:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency 8:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit frequency 9:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency Note:setting method 1~9,100% corresponds to the maximum frequency Torque control reverse P03.15 rotation upper-limit frequency keypad defined value 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency (P03.17 setting) 0 1~9:the same as P03.14 Torque control forward P03.16 rotation upper-limit frequency keypad defined Setting value P03.17 range:0.00Hz~P00.03(the 50.00Hz Maximum frequency) Torque control reverse 50.00Hz rotation upper-limit 149 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Detailed instruction of parameters Name Default value frequency keypad defined value 0:Keypad sets the upper-limit of torque(P03.18 sets the value of P03.16; P03.19 sets the value of P03.17) 1:Analog AI1 setting torque upper-limit 2:Analog AI2 setting torque upper-limit 3:Analog AI3 setting torque upper-limit 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque upper-limit Electromotion P03.18 torque upper-limit keypad setting 5:MODBUS communication setting torque upper-limit 6:PROFIBUS 0 communication setting torque upper-limit 7: Ethernet communication setting torque upper-limit 8:CAN communication setting torque upper-limit Note:setting means 1~9,100% corresponds to three times of motor current. P03.19 P03.20 P03.21 Brake torque upper-limit setting saurce selection 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency (P03.21 setting) 1~8:the same as P03.18 Brake torque upper-limit keypad setting 0 180.0% 0.0~300.0%(rated current of the motor) Weakening coefficience in 180.0% constant power zone The loweat weakening P03.22 coefficient in Constant P03.23 The loweat weakening 0.1~2.0 0.3 power zone 10%~100% 150 20% Goodrive300 inverters Function Basic operation instruction Name code Detailed instruction of parameters Default value point in Constant power zone P03.24 Max. voltage limit 0.0~120.0% 100.0% P03.25 Pre-exciting time 0.000~10.000s 0.300s P17.32 Magnetic flux linkage 0.0~200.0% 0 7.4 V/F control Goodrive300 series inverters provide internal V/F control which can be used in the cases where it does not need high control accuracy. It is also recommended to use V/F control when one inverter drives multiple motors. Goodrive300 series inverters provide multiple V/F curve modes. The user can select the corresponding V/F curve to the site needs. Or they can set the corresponding V/F curve to their own needs. Recommendations: For the load of constant torque, such as the conveyor belt which runs linearly. It is properly to select linear V/F curve because it needs constant torque. For the load of decreasing torque, such as fans and water pumps, it is properly to select corresponding 1.3th, 1.7th or 2th power of V/F curve because the actual torque is 2-squared or 3-squared of the rotating speed. Goodrive300 series inverters provide multi-dots V/F curve, the user can change the output V/F curve by setting the voltage and frequency of three middle dots. The whole curve is comsisted of 5 dots. The starting dot is (0Hz, 0V), and the ending dot is (the basic frequency of the motor, the rated voltage of the motor). During the setting processing: 0≤f1≤f2≤f3≤the basic frequency of the motor; 0≤V1≤V2≤V3≤the rated voltage of the motor. 151 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Goodrive300 series inverters provide special function code for V/F control mode which can improve the performance of V/F control by means of setting. 1. Torque boost Torque boost function can compensate the performance of low speed torque during V/F control. The inverter will adjust the torque boost according to the actual load. Note: The torque boost takes effect only when the frequency is under the cap frequency of the boost. If the torque boost is too big, low frequency vibration or overcurrent fault may occur. Please lower the torque boost. 2. Energy-saving running In the actual operation, the inverter can search by itself to achieve a better effect point. The inverter can work with high effect to save energy. Note: This function is usually used in the cases where the load is light or empty. If the load transients frequently, this function is not appropriate to be slected. 3. V/F slips compensation gain V/F control belongs to the open loop mode. If the load of the motor transients suddenly, the fluctuation of the rotation speed may occur. In the cases where the high accuracy speed is needed, slip compensation gain (internal output adjustment) can be set to compensate the speed change caused by load fluctuation. 152 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Setting range of slip compensation gain: 0~200%, of which 100% corresponds to the rated slip frequency. Note: Rated slip frequency= (rated synchronous rotation speed of the motor-rated rotation speed of the motor) *number of pole pairs/60. 4. Vibration control Motor vibration occurs frequently when applying V/F control mode in the cases where high power is needed. In order to settle this problem, Goodrive300 series inverters add two function codes which are set to control the vibration factors. The user can set the corresponding function code according to the vibration frequency. Note: Bigger the set value, more effective is the control. If the set value is too big, overcurrent may occur to the motor. 5. User-defined V/F curve (V/F seperation) function When the user selects the user-defined V/F curve function in Goodrive300 series inverters, they can set the given channel of voltage and frequency and the corresponding ACC/DEC time, or the two can combinate to form a real-time curve. Note: the application of V/F curve separation can be used in many cases with various kinds of power supply of the inverter. But the users should set and adjust the parameters with caution. Incorrect parameters may cause damage to the inverter. Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 P00.00 Speed control mode (applying to AM,SM) 153 1 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 (applying to AM) 2:V/F control (applying to AM,SM) P00.03 P00.04 P00.05 Max. output frequency Upper limit of the running frequency Lower limit of the running frequency P00.04~400.00Hz 50.00Hz P00.05~P00.03 50.00Hz 0.00Hz~P00.04 0.00Hz P00.11 ACC time 1 0.0~3600.0s P00.12 DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model Depend on model P02.00 P02.02 P02.04 Motor type 1 Asynchronous motor 1 rated power Asynchronous motor 1 rated voltage 0:Asynchronous motor 0 1:Synchronous motor 0.01Hz~P00.03(Max frequency 50.00 Depend 0~1200V on model 1:Multi-dots V/F curve 2:1.3th power low torque V/F curve P04.00 Motor 1V/F curve setting 3:1.7th power low torque V/F curve 0 4:2.0th power low torque V/F curve 5:Customized V/F(V/F separation) P04.01 P04.02 P04.03 Motor 1 torque boost Motor 1 torque boost close Motor 1V/F 0.0%:(automatic)0.1%~10.0% 0.0%~50.0%(the motor 1) 0.00Hz~P04.05 rated frequency 0.0% of 20.0% 0.00Hz Frequency point 1 P04.04 P04.05 Motor 1V/F voltage point 1 0.0%~110.0% Motor 1V/F P04.03~ P04.07 Frequency point 2 154 00.0% 00.00Hz Goodrive300 inverters Function code P04.06 P04.07 P04.08 P04.09 Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters value Motor 1V/F voltage point 2 0.0%~110.0% Motor 1V/F Frequency point 3 P04.05~ P02.02 or P04.05~ P02.16 Motor 1V/F voltage point 3 0.0%~110.0% Motor 1V/F slip Default 0.0~200.0% 00.0% 00.00Hz 00.0% 0.0% compensation gain P04.10 P04.11 P04.12 Motor 1 low frequency vibration control factor Motor 1 high frequency vibration control factor Motor 1 vibration control 0~100 10 0~100 10 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 30.00 Hz threshold 0:Linear V/F curve 1:Multi-dots V/F curve P04.13 Motor 2V/Fcurve setting 2:1.3th power of torque V/F curve 3:1.7 th power of torque V/F curve 0 4:2.0 th power of torque V/F curve 5:self-defined V/F(V/Fseperation ) P04.14 P04.15 P04.16 P04.17 P04.18 Motor 2 torque boost 0.0%: (automatic) 0.1%~10.0% Motor 2 torque boost close 0.0%~50.0%(rated frequency of motor 1) Motor 2V/F frequency point 1 0.00Hz~P04.05 Motor 2V/F voltage point 1 0.0%~110.0% Motor 2V/F frequency P04.03~ P04.07 0.0% 20.0% 0.00Hz 00.0% 00.00Hz point 2 P04.19 P04.20 Motor 2V/F voltage point 2 0.0%~110.0% Motor 2V/F frequency P04.05~ P02.02 or P04.05~ P02.16 00.0% 00.00Hz point 3 P04.21 P04.22 Motor 2V/F voltage point 3 0.0%~110.0% Motor 2V/F slip compensation gain 0.0~200.0% 155 00.0% 0.0% Goodrive300 inverters Function code P04.23 P04.24 Basic operation instruction Name Motor 2 low frequency vibration control factor Motor 2 high frequency Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0~100 10 0~100 10 vibration control factor P04.25 P04.26 Motor 2 vibration control threshold Energy-saving running selection 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 30.00 Hz 0: no action 0 1: automatic energy-saving running 0:Keypad seting voltage: the output voltage is determined by P04.28. 1:AI1setting voltage ; 2:AI2 setting voltage; 3:AI3 setting voltage; 4:HDI1 setting voltage; 5:Multi-stes setting voltage; P04.27 Voltage Setting Channal selection 6:PID setting voltage; 7:MODBUS communication setting 0 voltage; 8:PROFIBUS communication setting voltage; 9:Ethernet communication setting voltage;(Reversed) 10:CAN communication setting voltage; (Reversed) P04.28 Keypad setting voltage 0.0%~100.0%(the rated voltage of motor) 100.0% P04.29 Voltage increasing time 0.0~3600.0s 5.0s P04.30 Voltage decreasing time 0.0~3600.0s 5.0s P04.31 Output maximum voltage P04.32 Output minimum voltage P04.32~100.0%(the rated voltage of motor) 0.0%~P04.31(the rated voltage of motor) 156 100.0% 0.0% Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction 7.5 Torque control Goodrive300 series inverters support two kinds of control mode: torque control and rotation speed control. The core of rotation speed is that the whole control focuses on the stable speed and ensures the setting speed is the same as the actual running speed. The Max. Load sould be in the range of the torque limit. The core of torque control is that the whole control focues on the stable torque and ensures the setting torque is the same as the actual output torque. At the same time, the output frequency is among the upper limit or the lower limit. 157 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Name Basic operation instruction Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0: Sensorless vector control mode 0 (applying to AM,SM) 1: Sensorless vector control mode 1 (applying P00.00 Speed control mode 1 to AM) 2:V/F control (applying to AM,SM) Note:AM-Asynchronous motor SMsynchronous motor 0:Torque control is invalid 1:Keypad setting torque(P03.11) 2:Analog AI1 setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 3:Analog AI2 setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 4:Analog AI3 setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 5:Pulse frequency HDI setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) P03.11 Torque setting method 6: Multi-stage torque setting(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 0 7:MODBUS communication setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 8:PROFIBUS communication setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 9:Ethernet communication setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) 10:CAN communication setting torque(100% corresponds to 3 times of the motor current) P03.12 Keypad setting torque -300.0%~300.0%( the rated current of the motor) 158 50.0% Goodrive300 inverters Function code P03.13 Basic operation instruction Name Torque given filter Detailed instruction of parameters 0.000~10.000s time Default value 0 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.16) 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. Torque control forward P03.14 rotation upper-limit frequency) 5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency setting frequency) source selection 6:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit 0 frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 7:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 8:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 9:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) Torque control P03.15 reverse rotation upper-limit 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.17) 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 159 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters frequency setting 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit source selection frequency(100% corresponds to the max. Default value frequency) 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 5:Multi-stage setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 6:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 7:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 8:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to the max. frequency) 9:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to the max. frequency) Torque control forward P03.16 rotation upper-limit 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 50.00 Hz 0.00 Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 50.00 Hz frequency keypad defined value Torque control P03.17 reverse rotation upper-limit 160 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Name Basic operation instruction Detailed instruction of parameters Default value frequency keypad defined value 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.20) 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) Electromotion P03.18 torque upper-limit setting source selection 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 0 5:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 6:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 7:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 8:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 0:Keypad setting upper-limit frequency(P03.21) Brake torque P03.19 upper-limit setting source selection 1:Analog AI1 setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 2:Analog AI2 setting upper-limit 161 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 3:Analog AI3 setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 4:Pulse frequency HDI setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 5:MODBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 6:PROFIBUS communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 7:Ethernet communication setting upper-limit frequency (100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) 8:CAN communication setting upper-limit frequency(100% corresponds to three times of the rated current of the motor) Electromotion P03.20 torque upper-limit 0.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor) 180.0% 0.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor) 180.0% keypad setting Brake torque P03.21 upper-limit keypad P17.09 Output torque P17.15 Torque given value setting -250.0~250.0% 0.0% -300.0~300.0%( rated current of the motor) 7.6 Parmeters of the motor Physical accident may occur if the motor starts up suddenly during autotune. Please check the safety of surrounding environment of the 162 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction motor and the load before autotune. The power is still applied even the motor stops running during static autotune. Please do not touch the motor until the autotune is completed, otherwise there would be electric shock. Do not carry out the rotation autotune if the motor is coupled with the load, please do not operate on the rotation autotune. Otherwise misaction or damage may occur to the inverter or the mechanical devices. When carry out autotune on the motor which is coupled with load, the motor parameter won’t be counted correctly and misaction may occur. It is proper to de-couple the motor from the load during autotune when necessary. Goodrive300 series inverters can drive both asynchronous motors and synchronous motors. And at the same time, they can support two sets of motor parameters which can shift between two motors through multi-function digital input terminal or communication. The control performance of the inverter is based on the established accurate motor model. The user has to carry out the motor autotune before first running (take motor 1 as the example). Note: 1. Set the motor parameters according to the name plate of the motor. 2. During the motor autotune, de-couple the motor form the load if rotation autotune is selected to make the motor is in a static and empty state, otherwise the result of autotune is incorrect. The asynchronous motors can autotune the parameters of P02.06~P02.10, while the synchronous 163 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction motors can autotune the parameters of P02.20~P02.23. 3. During the motor autotune, do not to de-couple the motor form the load if static autotune is selected. Because only some parameters of the motor are involved, the control performance is not as better as the rotation autotune. The asynchronous motors can autotune the parameters of P02.06~P02.10, while the synchronous motors can autotune the parameters of P02.20~P02.22. P02.23 (synchronous motor 1 counter-electromotive force constant) can be counted to attain. 4. Motor autotune only involves the current motor. Switch the motor through P08.31 to carry out the autotune on the other motor. Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Keypad running command channel(“LOCAL/REMOT” light off) P00.01 Running command channel 1:Terminal running command channel (“LOCAL/REMOT” flickering) 2:Communication running 1 command channel (“LOCAL/REMOT” on); 0:No operation P00.15 Motor parameter 1:Rotation autotuning autotuning 2:Static autotuning 1 0 3: Static autotuning 2 P02.00 P02.01 P02.02 P02.03 P02.04 P02.05 P02.06 P02.07 Motor type 1 Asynchronous motor 1 rated power Asynchronous motor 1 rated power Asynchronous motor 1 rated rotating speed Asynchronous motor 1 rated voltage Asynchronous motor 1 rated current Asynchronous motor 1 stator resistor Asynchronous motor 1 0:Asynchronous motor 1:Synchronous motor 0.1~3000.0kW 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max frequency) 1~36000rpm 0~1200V 0.8~6000.0A 0.001~65.535Ω 0.001~65.535Ω 164 0 Depend on model 50.00Hz Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters rated power rotor resistor P02.08 P02.09 P02.10 P02.15 P02.16 P02.17 P02.18 P02.19 P02.20 P02.21 Asynchronous motor 1 magnetic leakage Asynchronous motor 1mutual inductance Asynchronous motor 1 non-load current Synchronous motor 1 rated power Synchronous motor 1 rated frequency Synchronous motor 1 number of poles pairs Synchronous motor 1 rated voltage Synchronous motor 1 rated current Synchronous motor 1 stator resistor Synchronous motor 1 direct axis inductance quadrature axis 0.1~6553.5mH 0.1~6553.5mH 0.1~6553.5A 0.1~3000.0kW 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 1~50 0~1200V 0.8~6000.0A 0.001~65.535Ω 0.1~6553.5mH 0.1~6553.5mH inductance P02.23 Synchronous motor 1 Back EMF constant value on model Synchronous motor 1 P02.22 Default 0~10000 Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model 50.00Hz 2 Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model 300 Multi-function digital input P05.01~P0 terminals 5.09 (S1~S8, HDI) function 35: Shift from motor 1 to motor 2 selection The shifting channel P08.31 between motor 1 and motor 2 LED ones: 0: terminal shifting; digital terminal is 35 1: MODBUS communication shifting 2: PROFIBUS communication shifting 165 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 3: Ethernet communication shifting 4: CAN communication shifting P12.00 P12.01 P12.02 P12.03 Motor type 2 Asynchronous motor 2 rated power Asynchronous motor 2 rated frequency Asynchronous motor 2 rated rotation speed 0:Asynchronous motor 1:Synchronous motor 0.1~3000.0kW 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 1~36000rpm Asynchronous motor 2 P12.04 rated 0~1200V voltage Asynchronous motor 2 P12.05 rated 0.8~6000.0A current P12.06 P12.07 P12.08 P12.09 P12.10 P12.15 Asynchronous motor 2 rotor resistance Asynchronous motor 2 stator resistance Asynchronous motor 2 leakage Asynchronous motor 2 mutual induction Asynchronous motor 2 noload current Synchronous motor 2 rated power 0.001~65.535Ω 0.001~65.535Ω 0.1~655.35mH 0.1~655.35mH 0.1~6553.5A 0.1~3000.0kW 0 Depend on model 50.00Hz Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Synchronous motor 2 P12.16 rated 0.01Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 50.00Hz frequency P12.17 P12.18 Synchronous motor 2 pority pairs Synchronous motor 2 1~50 0~1200V 166 2 Depend Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters rated voltage rated 0.8~6000.0A current P12.20 P12.21 P12.22 Synchronous motor 2 rotor resistance Synchronous motor 2 d-axis inductor Synchronous motor 2 quadrature axis inductor value on model Synchronous motor 2 P12.19 Default 0.001~65.535Ω 0.1~6553.5mH 0.1~6553.5mH Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Depend on model Synchronous motor 2 P12.23 counter-electromotive force 0~10000 300 constant 7.7 Start-up and stop control The start-up and stop control of the inverter includes three states: start after the running command during normal powering on, start after the restarting function becomes valid during normal powering on and start after the automatic fault reset. Below is the detailed instruction for three startings. There are three starting methods for the inverter: start from the starting frequency directly, start after the AC braking and start after the rotation speed tracking. The user can select according to different situations to meet their needs. For the load with big inertia, especially in the cases where the reverse rotation may occur, it is better to select starting after DC braking and then starting after rotation speed tracking. Note: it is recommended to use the direct starting to drive synchronous motor. 1. The starting logic figure of starting after the running command during the normal powering on 167 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction 2. The starting logic figure of starting after the restarting function becomes valid during the normal powering on 168 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction 3. The starting logic figure of starting after the automatic fault reset Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Keypad running command channel(LED light off) P00.01 Running command channel 1:Terminal running command channel (LED flickering) 2:Communication running 1 command channel (LED on) P00.11 P00.12 ACC time 1 0.0~3600.0s DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model Depend on model 0:Start-up directly P01.00 Start method 1:Start-up after DC braking 0 2: Start-up after rotation speed tracking 1 P01.01 P01.02 Starting frequency of direct start-up Retention time of the 0.00~50.00Hz 0.0~50.0s 169 0.50Hz 0.0s Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value starting frequency P01.03 P01.04 P01.05 The braking current before starting The braking time before starting 1: Reserved Reserved P01.08 Stop manner selection P01.12 P01.13 0.0s 0:Linear type P01.07 P01.11 0.0~50.0s selection Reserved P01.10 0.0% ACC/DEC manner P01.06 P01.09 0.0~150.0% The starting frequency of stop braking The waiting time of stop braking DC braking current during stopping DC braking time during stopping Dead time of for/rev rotation 0:Decelerate to stop 1:Coast to stop 0.00Hz~P00.03(the Max. frequency) 0 0 0.00Hz 0.0~50.0s 0.0s 0.0~150.0% 0.0% 0.0~50.0s 0.0s 0.0~3600.0s 0.0s Set the threshold point of the inverter: P01.14 Shifting between FWD/REV rotation 0:Switch after 0 frequency 1:Switch after the starting frequency 0 2: Switch after the speed reach P01.15 and delay for P01.24 P01.15 P01.16 P01.17 P01.18 Stopping speed Detection of stopping speed Detection time of the feedback speed Terminal 0.00~100.00Hz 0.10 Hz 0: Speed setting (the only detection method in V/F mode) 0 1: Speed detecting value Setting range:0.0~100.0s (only valid when P01.16=1) 0:The terminal running command is running protection slection invalid when powering on 170 0.05s 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters when powering on 1: The terminal running command is Default value valid when powering on The running frequency is P01.19 lower than the lower limit one (valid if the lower limit frequency is above 0) P01.20 P01.21 P01.22 P01.23 Hibernation restore delay time Restart after power off The waiting time of restart after power off Start delay time 0: Run at the lower-limit frequency 1: Stop 0 2: Hibernation 0.0~3600.0s(valid when P01.15=2) 0: Disable 1: Enable 0.0s 0 0.0~3600.0s(valid when P01.17=1) 1.0s 0.0~60.0s 0.0s 1: Forward rotation operation 2: Reverse rotation operation 4: Forward rotation jogging 5: Reverse rotation jogging P05.01~P0 Digital input function 5.09 selection 6: Coast to stop 7: Fault reset 8: Operation pause 21:ACC/DEC time option1 22:ACC/DEC time option2 30:ACC/DEC prohibition P08.06 P08.07 P08.08 P08.00 P08.01 P08.02 Jogging running frequency 0.00~P00.03(the Max. frequency) Jogging running ACC time Jogging running DEC time ACC time 2 DEC time 2 ACC time 3 0.0~3600.0s 5.00Hz Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 171 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P08.03 P08.04 P08.05 P08.28 P08.29 Basic operation instruction Name DEC time 3 ACC time 4 DEC time 4 Times of fault reset Interval time of automatic fault reset Detailed instruction of parameters 0.0~3600.0s Default value Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 0.0~3600.0s Depend on model 0~10 0.1~3600.0s 0 1.0s 7.8 Frequency setting Goodrive300 series inverters can set the frequency by various means. The given channel can be divided into main given channel and assistant given channel. There are two mian given channels: A frequency given channel and B frequency given channel. These two given channels can carry out mutual simple math calculation between each other. And the given channels can be shifted dynamically through set multi-funciton terminals. There are three assistane given channels: keypad UP/DOWN input, terminals UP/DOWN switch input and digital potentiometer input. The three ways equal to the effect of input UP/DOWN given in internal assistant given of the inverter. The user can enable the given method and the effect of the method to the frequency given by setting function codes. The actual given of the inverter is comsisted of main given channel and assistant given channel. 172 Goodrive300 inverters P00.10 Basic operation instruction Keypad P00.06 (A frequency command selection) Keypad setting frequency AI1 0 AI2 1 AI3 2 3 HDI P17.00 Setting frequency 4 Simple PLC 5 Multi-stage speed 7 PID 8 MODBUS 9 A P00.04 (the upper limit of the running frequency) 0 B 1 A+B 10 2 PROFIBUS + 3 11 A frequ ency com man d Erthernet CAN A-B + 4 Max 5 A B Min A P00.10 P17.02 Ramp given frequency 6 P00.05 (the lower limit of the running frequency) P00.09 (the setting source combination) B Keypad 1 P00.07 B frequency command selection Keypad setting frequency AI1 AI2 0 P00.03 0 (the Max. output frequency) 1 AI3 HDI 2 P00.08 (B frequency command reference selection) 3 4 Simple PLC Multi-stage speed 5 6 7 PID MODBUS 8 9 10 PROFIBUS 11 Terminal function 33 Frequency increasing/decreasing setting temporal clear Erthernet P17.13 Keypad digital adjustment valid CAN Terminal function 12 Frequency increasing/decreasing setting temporal clear valid 0 0 invalid Invalid UP terminal DOWN terminal P08.41 unit UP/DOWN Digital potentiometer enabling 0 1 UP/DOWN enabling Digital potentiometer P08.43 unit UP/DOWN terminal valid selection 0 UP/DOWN enabling Digital potentiometer enabling P08.43 tens setting (frequency control selection) P08.41 tens setting (frequency control selection) + + Goodrive300 series inverters support the shifting between different given channels, and the detailed shifting rules is as below: 173 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Multi-function Current given channel P00.09 terminal function 13 Shifting from A channel to B channel A B Multi-function Multi-function terminal function terminal function 14 15 Shifting from Shifting from combination combination setting to A setting to B channel channel / / B / / / A+B / A B A-B / A B Max(A,B) / A B Min(A,B) / A B Note: “/” means the multi-function terminal is invalid under the current given channel. When select multi-function terminal UP (10) and DOWN (11) to set the internal assistant frequency, P08.44 and P08.45 can be set to increase or decrease the set frequency quickly. Relative parameters list: Function code Name P00.03 Max. output frequency P00.04 Upper limit of the running Detailed instruction of parameters Default value P00.04~400.00Hz 50.00Hz P00.05~P00.03 50.00Hz 174 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value frequency P00.05 Lower limit of the running 0.00Hz~P00.04 0.00Hz frequency 0:Keypad data setting 1:Analog AI1 setting 2:Analog AI2 setting 3:Analog AI3 setting 4:High-speed pulse HDI setting 5:Simple PLC program setting P00.06 A frequency command selection 6: Multi-stage speed running setting 7: PID control setting 0 8:MODBUS communication setting 9:PROFIBUS communication setting 10:Ethernet communication setting(reserved) 11:CAN communication setting(reserved) 0:Keypad data setting 1:Analog AI1 setting 2:Analog AI2 setting 3:Analog AI3 setting 4:High-speed pulse HDI setting 5:Simple PLC program setting P00.07 B frequency command selection 6: Multi-stage speed running setting 7: PID control setting 1 8:MODBUS communication setting 9:PROFIBUS communication setting 10:Ethernet communication setting(reserved) 11:CAN communication setting(reserved) P00.08 P00.09 B frequency command reference selection Combination type of the 0:The Max. output frequency 1:A frequency command 0:A 0 0 175 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name setting source Default Detailed instruction of parameters value 1:B 2:(A+B)combination 3:(A-B)combination 4:Max(A,B)combination 5:Min(A,B)combination 10:Increasing frequency setting(UP) 11:Decreasing Multi-function digital input P05.01~P0 5.09 terminals (S1~S8,HDI) function selection frequency setting(DOWN) 12:Cancel the frequency change setting 13:Shift between A setting and B setting 14:Shift between combination setting and A setting 15:Shift between combination setting and B setting 0x000~0x1223 LED ones:frequency enable selection 0:Both ∧ / ∨ keys and digital potentiometer adjustments are effective 1:Only ∧ / ∨ keys adjustments is effective 2:Only digital potentiometer adjustments is effective 3:Neither P08.42 Keypad data control setting ∧ / ∨ keys nor digital potentiometer adjustments are effective LED tens: frequency control selection 0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0 1:Effective for all frequency setting manner 2:Ineffective for multi-stage speed when multi-stage speed has the priority LED hundreds: action selection during stopping 0:Setting is valid 176 0x0000 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Default Detailed instruction of parameters value 1:Valid during running, cleared after stopping 2:Valid during running, cleared after receiving the stop command LED thousands: ∧/∨ keys and digital potentiometer Integral function 0:The Integral function is effective 1:The Integral function is ineffective P08.43 Keypad data potentiometer integral ratio 0.01~10.00s 0.10s 0x00~0x221 LED ones: frequency control selection 0:UP/DOWN terminals setting effective 1:UP/DOWN terminals setting ineffective LED tens: frequency control selection 0:Only effective when P00.06=0 or P00.07=0 P08.44 UP/DOWN terminals control setting 1:All frequency means are effective 2:When the multi-stage are priority, it is 0x000 ineffective to the multi-stage LED hundreds: action selection when stop 0:Setting effective 1:Effective in the running, clear after stop 2:Efective in the running, clear after receiving the stop commands P08.45 P08.46 P17.00 P17.02 UP terminals frequency changing ratio DOWN terminals frequency changing ratio Set frequency 0.01~50.00Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s 0.01~50.00 Hz/s 0.50 Hz/s 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. output (the Max. output frequency) Ramp given frequency 0.00Hz~P00.03 frequency) 177 0.00Hz 0.00Hz Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function Name code Detailed instruction of parameters Default value Display the adjustment through the P17.14 Digital adjustment keypad of the inverter. 0.00V Range : 0.00Hz~P00.03 7.9 Analog input Goodrive300 series inverters have three analog input terminals and 1 high-speed pulse input terminals (of which, AI1 and AI2 are 0~10V/0~20mA and Al can select voltage input or current input by J1, A2 can select voltage input or current input by J2 and AI3 is for -10~10V ) as the standard configuration. The inputs can be filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. AI1 input voltage Analog curve input setting P17.15 AI1 AI2 input voltage Analog input filter P05.32 P05.33 P05.34 P05.35 P05.36 P17.16 AI2 AI3 input voltage P05.37 P05.38 P05.39 P05.40 P05.41 P17.17 P05.42 P05.43 P05.44 P05.45 P05.46 P05.47 AI3 P05.48 AI3 HDI input frequency P17.18 0 AI1/AI2/HDI 0 HDI P05.50 P05.51 P05.52 P05.53 1 1 2 P05.00 HDI input type selection P05.00 P05.49 HDI high speed pulse input function selection 0: HDI is high speed pulse input 1: HDI is switch input P05.49 0: frequency setting input 1: counter input 2: length counter input Relative parameters list: 178 P05.54 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P05.00 P05.32 P05.33 P05.34 P05.35 P05.36 P05.37 P05.38 P05.39 P05.40 P05.41 P05.42 P05.43 P05.44 P05.45 P05.46 P05.47 P05.48 Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters HDI input type selection Lower limit of AI1 Corresponding setting of the lower limit of AI1 Upper limit of AI1 Corresponding setting of the upper limit of AI1 AI1 input filter time Lower limit of AI2 Corresponding setting of the lower limit of AI2 Upper limit of AI2 Corresponding setting of the upper limit of AI2 AI2 input filter time Lower limit of AI3 Corresponding setting of the lower limit of AI3 middle value of AI3 Corresponding middle setting of AI3 Upper limit of AI3 Corresponding setting of the upper limit of AI3 AI3 input filter time 0:HDI is high pulse input P05.49 input function selection value 0 1:HDI is switch input 0.00V~P05.25 0.00V 0.0% -100.0%~100.0% P05.23~10.00V 10.00V 100.0% -100.0%~100.0% 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s 0.00V 0.00V~P05.30 -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% P05.28~10.00V 10.00V -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s -10.00V~P05.35 -10.00V -100.0%~100.0% -100.0% P05.33~P05.37 0.00V -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% P05.35~10.00V 10.00V -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% 0.000s~10.000s 0:Fquency HDI high-speed pulse Default setting 0.100s input, frequency setting source 1:Cunter input, high-speed pulse counter input terminals 2:Length counting input, length counter input terminals 179 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function Name code P05.50 P05.51 P05.52 Basic operation instruction Lower limit frequency of HDI Corresponding setting of HDI low frequency setting Upper limit frequency of HDI Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0.00 kHz ~ P05.43 0.00kHz -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% P05.41 ~50.00kHz 50.00kHz -100.0%~100.0% 100.0% 0.000s~10.000s 0.100s Corresponding setting of P05.53 upper limit frequency of HDI P05.54 HDI frequency input filter time 7.10 Analog output Goodrive300 series inverters have 2 analog output terminals (0~10V or 0~20mA) and 1 high speed pulse output terminal. Analog output signal can be filtered and the maximum and minimum values can be adjusted. The analog output signals can be proportional to motor speed, output frequency, output current, motor torque, motor power, etc. Output instructions: 180 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Set value Function 0 Running frequency 0~the Max. output frequency 1 Set frequency 0~ the Max. output frequency 2 Ramp given frequency 0~ the Max. output frequency 3 Running rotation speed 4 5 Output current (relative to the inverter) Output current (relative to the motor) Instructions 0~2 times of the rated synchronous rotation speed of the motor 0~2 times of the rated current of the inverter 0~2 times of the rated current of the inverter 6 Output voltage 0~1.5 times of the rated voltage of the inverter 7 Output power 0~2 times of the rated power 8 Set torque 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor 9 Output torque 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor 10 AI1 0~10V/0~20mA 11 AI2 0~10V/0~20mA 12 AI3 -10V~10V HDI 0.00~50.00kHz 13 14 15 16 17 18 MODBUS communication set value 1 -1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% MODBUS communication set -1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% value 2 PROFIBUS communication -1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% set value 1 PROFIBUS communication -1000~1000,100 corresponds to 100.0% set value 2 Torque current(relative to the 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor rated current of the motor) Exciting current (relative to 19 the rated current of the 20 Reserved 0~2 times of the rated current of the motor motor) Relative parameters list: Function code P06.00 Name HDO output type Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Open collector pole high speed pulse 181 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Detailed instruction of parameters Name Default value output 1: Open collector pole output P06.14 P06.15 AO1 output selection 0:Running frequency 0 AO2 output selection 1:Set frequency 0 2:Ramp reference frequency 3:Running rotation speed 4:Output current (relative to the rated current of the inverter) 5:Output current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 6:Output voltage 7:Output power 8:Set torque value 9:Output torque 10:Analogy AI1 input value 11:Analogy AI2 input value P06.16 HDO high-speed pulse output selection 12:Analogy AI3 input value 0 13:High speed pulse HDI input value 14:MODBUS communication set value 1 15:MODBUS communication set value 2 16:PROFIBUS communication set value 1 17:PROFIBUS communication set value 2 18:Torque current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 19:Pre-magnetizing current(relative to the rated current of the motor) 20:Reserved P06.17 P06.18 Lower limit of AO1 output 0.0%~P06.15 Corresponding AO1 0.00V~10.00V output to the lower limit P06.19 Upper limit of AO1 output P06.20 The corresponding AO1 0.0% 0.00V P06.13~100.0% 100.0% 0.00V~10.00V 10.00V 182 Goodrive300 inverters Function Basic operation instruction Name code Detailed instruction of parameters Default value output to the upper limit P06.21 AO1 output filter time P06.22 Lower limit of AO2 output 0.0%~P06.20 Corresponding AO2 0.00V~10.00V P06.23 P06.24 P06.25 P06.26 P06.27 P06.28 P06.29 P06.30 P06.31 0.000s~10.000s output to the lower limit Upper limit of AO2 output Corresponding AO2 P06.18~100.0% 0.00V~10.00V output to the upper limit AO2 output filter time 0.000s~10.000s Lower limit of HDO output 0.0%~P06.25 Corresponding HDO 0.00~50.00kHz output to the lower limit Upper limit of HDO output P06.23~100.0% Corresponding HDO 0.00~50.00kHz output to the upper limit HDO output filter time 0.000s~10.000s 0.000s 0.0% 0.00V 100.0% 10.00V 0.000s 0.00% 0.0kHz 100.0% 50.00kHz 0.000s 7.11 Digital input Goodrive300 series inverters have 8 programmable digital input terminals and 1 open circuit electrode output terminal in the standard configuration. All functions of the digital input terminals are programmable by the function codes. Open collector pole input can be selected into high speed pulse input terminal or common switch input terminal by function code. When selected into HDI, the user can select HDI high speed pulse input as frequency given, counting input or length pulse input by setting. 183 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction This parameter is used to set the function corresponds to the digital multi-function terminals. Note: two different multi-function terminals can not be set as one function. Set Function Instructions value The inverter does not work even there is input signal. 0 No function It is necessary to set the terminal which can not be used to non-function to avoid misacting. 1 Forward running(FWD) The forward or reverse rotation of the inverter can be 2 Reverse running(REV) controlled by the external terminals. 184 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function Instructions The terminal can determine the running mode of the 3 3-wire running control inverter is 3-wire control mode. Refer to P05.13 for detailed instruction of 3-wire control mode. 4 Forward jogging See 5 Reverse jogging frequency, jogging ACC/DEC time. P08.06, P08.07 and P08.08 for jogging The inverter closes off the output. The motor is not controlled by the inverter during the stopping. This method is usually to be used when the load inertia is 6 Coast to stop big and it has no requirement to the stopping time. It has the same meaning with the “coast to stop” in P01.08 and usually used in remote control. External fault reset. It has the same function with the 7 Fault reset reset function of STOP/RST on the keypad. This function can realize remote fault reset. The inverter decelerates to stop. But all running parameters are in the memory state. For example, 8 Operation pause PLC parameters, traverse parameters and PID parameters. After the signal disappears, the inverter will come back to the state before stopping. When the external fault signal is sent to the inverter, 9 External fault input 10 Frequency setting up(UP) This parameter is used to modify the increasing and Frequency setting decreasing command during the external terminal the inverter will report the fault and stop. 12 down(DOWN) given frequency. Frequency 12 increasing/decreasing setting clear Frequency increasing/decreasing setting clear terminal can cancel the assistant channel frequency 185 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function Instructions set by the internal UP/DOWN of the inverter to make the given frequency restore to the frequency given by the main given frequency channel. 13 14 Shifting between A setting and B setting This function can realize the shifting between the frequency setting channels. Shifting between A setting The 13th function can realize the shifting between A and combination setting frequency given channel and B frequency given channel. The 14th function can realize the shifting between A frequency given channel and the combination setting Shifting between B setting 15 and combination setting channel set by P00.09 The 15th function can realize the shifting between B frequency given channel and the combination setting channel set by P00.09 16 Multi-stage speed terminal 1 The 16 stage speeds can be set by the combination of 17 Multi-stage speed terminal 2 digital state of four terminals. 18 Multi-stage speed terminal 3 Note: multi-stage speed 1is the low position, multi-stage speed 4 is the high position. 19 Multi-stage speed terminal 4 20 Multi-stage speed pause 21 ACC/DEC time selection 1 Multi-stag Multi-stag Multi-stag Multi-stage e speed 4 e speed 3 e speed 2 speed 1 BIT3 BIT2 BIT1 BIT0 Shield the multi-stage speed selection terminal function to keep the setting value at the current state. Select 4 ACC/DEC time by the combination of the 2 terminals. Terminal Terminal 22 ACC/DEC time selection 2 ACC/DEC time Corresponding selection parameter 1 2 OFF OFF ACC/DEC time 1 P00.11/P00.12 ON OFF ACC/DEC time 2 P08.00/P08.01 OFF ON ACC/DEC time 3 P08.02/P08.03 ON ON ACC/DEC time 4 P08.04/P08.05 186 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function 23 Simple PLC stop reset 24 Simple PLC pause Instructions Restart simple PLC and clear the memory state of PLC. Program pause during PLC implement. Run at the current speed stage. After cancel the function, simple PLC continues to run. 25 PID control pause Temporal PID invalid and the inverter will output at the current frequency. 26 Traverse pause (stop at the current frequency) 27 Traverse reset (return to the middle frequency) 28 Counter reset 29 Torque control enabling The inverter will stop at the current output and after canceling the function, the inverter will continue to traverse run at the current frequency. The setting frequency of the inverter will come back to the middle frequency. Counter clear The inverter shifts from torque control mode to speed control mode. Ensure the inverter will not be affected by the external 30 ACC/DEC disabling signals (except for the stopping command) and keep the current output frequency. 31 Counter trigging 32 Length reset Enable the pulse counter. Length counter clear When the terminal closes, the frequency set by Frequency 33 increasing/decreasing setting temporal clear UP/DOWN can be cleared. All set frequency will be restored into the given frequency by the frequency command channel and the frequency will come back to the value after the frequency increasing or decreasing. 34 DC braking The inverter will begin DC braking after the valid command. 35 36 Shifting between motor1 and Motor-shifting can be controlled after the terminal is motor2 Shift the command to the valid. After the function terminal become valid, the running 187 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function Instructions keypad command channel will be shifted into keypad running command channel and the running command channel will come back to the original state if the function terminal is invalid. After the function terminal become valid, the running Shift the command to the 37 terminals command channel will be shifted into terminal running command channel and the running command channel will come back to the original state if the function terminal is invalid. After the function terminal become valid, the running Shift the command to the 38 communication command channel will be shifted into communication running command channel and the running command channel will come back to the original state if the function terminal is invalid. 39 Pre-excitation command 40 Power consumption clear Perform pre-exciting if the terminal is valid until the terminal is invalid. The power consumption will be cleared after the command is valid. 41 Power consumption retention 42~60 Reversed If the command is valid, the current running of the inverter will not affect its power consumption. Relative parameters list: Function code Name P05.00 HDI input type selection P05.01 S1 terminals function P05.02 P05.03 Detailed instruction of parameters 0:HDI is high pulse input 1:HDI is switch input 0: No function selection 1: Forward rotation operation S2 terminals function 2: Reverse rotation operation selection 3: 3-wire control operation S3 terminals function 4: Forward rotation jogging selection 5: Reverse rotation jogging 188 Default value 0 1 4 7 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P05.04 Basic operation instruction Name S4 terminals function selection P05.05 S5 terminals function selection P05.06 P05.07 P05.08 S6 terminals function Detailed instruction of parameters 6: Coast to stop Default value 0 7: Fault reset 8: Operation pause 0 9: External fault input 10:Increasing frequency setting(UP) selection 11:Decreasing S7 terminals function setting(DOWN) 0 frequency selection 12:Cancel the frequency change setting S8 terminals function 13:Shift between A setting and B setting selection 14:Shift between combination setting 0 0 and A setting 15:Shift between combination setting and B setting 16:Multi-stage speed terminal 1 17:Multi-stage speed terminal 2 18:Multi-stage speed terminal 3 19:Multi- stage speed terminal 4 20:Multi- stage speed pause 21:ACC/DEC time option1 22:ACC/DEC time option2 23:Simple PLC stop reset 24:Simple PLC pause P05.09 HDI terminals function selection 25:PID control pause 26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current frequency) 27:Traverse reset(return to the center frequency) 28:Counter reset 29:Torque control prohibition 30:ACC/DEC prohibition 31:Counter trigger 32:Length reset 33:Cancel the frequency change setting temporally 34:DC brake 189 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 35:Shift the motor 1 into moor 2 36:Shift the command to the keypad 37:Shift the command to the terminals 38:Shift the command to the communication 39:Pre-magnetized command 40:Clear the power 41:Keep the power 42~63:Reserved P05.10 P05.11 Polarity selection of the input terminals Switch filter time 0x000~0x1FF 0x000 0.000~1.000s 0.010s 0:Virtual terminals is invalid 1:MODBUS communication virtual terminals are valid 2:PROFIBUS P05.12 Virtual terminals setting communication virtual terminals are valid 0 3: Ethernet communication virtual terminals are valid 4: CAN communication virtual terminals are valid 0:2-wire control 1 P05.13 Terminals control running 1:2-wire control 2 mode 2:3-wire control 1 0 3:3-wire control 2 P05.14 S1 terminal switching on 0.000~50.000s delay time P05.15 S1 0.000s 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P05.16 S2 terminal switching on 0.000~50.000s delay time P05.17 S2 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 190 0.000s 0.000s Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value delay time P05.18 S3 terminal switching on 0.000~50.000s delay time P05.19 S3 0.000s 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P05.20 S4 terminal switching on 0.000~50.000s delay time P05.21 S4 0.000s 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P05.22 S5 0.000~50.000s terminal switching on 0.000s delay time P05.23 S5 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P05.24 S6 0.000~50.000s terminal switching on 0.000s delay time P05.25 S6 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P05.26 S7 0.000~50.000s terminal switching on 0.000s delay time P05.27 S7 0.000~50.000s 0.000s terminal switching off delay time P05.28 S8 0.000~50.000s terminal switching on 0.000s delay time P05.29 S8 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 191 0.000s Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function Name code Detailed instruction of parameters Default value delay time P05.30 HDI 0.000~50.000s terminal switching on 0.000s delay time P05.31 HDI 0.000~50.000s terminal switching off 0.000s delay time P07.37 P17.12 Current fault bus voltage 0 Switch input terminals 0 state 7.12 Digital input Goodrive300 series inverters have 2 relay output terminals and 1 Y output terminal and 1 high speed pulse output terminal in the standard configuration. All functions of the digital input terminals are programmable by the function codes. Open collector pole input can be selected into high speed pulse input terminal or common switch input terminal by function code. The below table is the option of the four function parameters and selecting the repeated output terminal function is allowed. Set value Function 0 Invalid 1 Running 2 Forward running 3 Reverse running 4 Jogging 5 Inverter fault 6 FDT1 7 FDT2 8 Frequency arrival Instructions The output terminal has no function. Output ON signal when the inverter is running and there is frequency output. Output ON signal when the inverter is running forward and there is frequency output. Output ON signal when the inverter is running reverse and there is frequency output. Output ON signal when the inverter is jogging and there is frequency output. Output ON signal when the inverter is in fault Please refer to P08.32 and P08.33 for detailed information. Please refer to P08.34 and P08.35 for detailed information. Please refer to P08.36 for detailed information. 192 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function Instructions Output ON signal when the output frequency and 9 Zero-speed running given frequency of the inverter is 0 at the same time. 10 Upper-limit frequency arrival 11 Upper-limit frequency arrival Output ON signal when the running frequency of the inverter is the upper limit frequency. Output ON signal when the running frequency of the inverter is the lower limit frequency. When the main circuit and the control circuit is 12 Ready established and the protection function of the inverter is not active. The inverter is in the running state and it will output ON signal. 13 Pre-exciting 14 Overload pre-alarm Output ON signal when the inverter is in the pre-exciting state. Output ON signal if the inverter is beyond the pre-alarm point. Refer to P11.08~P11.10 for the detailed instruction. Output ON signal if the inverter is beyond the 15 Underload pre-alarm pre-alarm point. Refer to P11.11~P11.12 for the detailed instruction. 16 Simple PLC stage completion Output signal if the simple PLC stage is completed. 17 Simple PLC cycle completion 18 Set counting arrival 19 Fixed counting arrival 20 External fault valid 21 Length arrival 22 Running time arrival Output signal if the 1 simple PLC cycle is completed. Output ON signal if the detected counting exceeds the set value of P08.25. Output ON signal if the detected counting exceeds the set value of P08.26. Output ON signal if external fault occurs. Output ON signal if the actual detected length exceeds the se length by P08.19. Output ON signal if the accumulative running time of the inverter exceeds the setting time by P08.27. Output corresponding signal according to the 23 MODBUS communication setting value of MODBUS. Output ON signal if the virtual terminal output setting value is 1 and output OFF signal if the setting value is 0. 193 Goodrive300 inverters Set value Basic operation instruction Function Instructions Output corresponding signal according to the 24 POROFIBUS communication setting value of PROFIBUS. Output ON signal if the virtual terminal output setting value is 1 and output OFF signal if the setting value is 0. 25~30 Reserved Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Open collector pole high speed pulse P06.00 HDO output type output 0 1: Open collector pole output P06.01 Y output selection P06.02 HDO output selection P06.03 Relay RO1 output selection 0:Invalid 0 1:On operation 0 2:Forward rotation operation 1 3:Reverse rotation operation 4: Jogging operation 5:The inverter fault 6:FDT1 7:FDT2 8:Frequency arrival 9:Zero speed running 10:Upper limit frequency arrival 11:Lower limit frequency arrival 12:Ready for operation P06.04 Relay RO2 output selection 13:Pre-magnetizing 5 14:Ooverload pre-alarm 15: Uunderload pre-alarm 16:Ccompletion of simple PLC stage 17:Completion of simple PLC cycle 18:Setting count value arrival 19:Defined count value arrival 20:External fault valid 21:Length arrival 22:Running time arrival 23:MODBUS 194 communication virtual Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function Name code Detailed instruction of parameters Default value terminals output 24:PROFIBUS communication virtual terminals output 25~30:Reserved P06.05 Polarity selection of output terminals 0x00~0x0F 0x00 P06.06 Y switching on delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s P06.07 Y switching off delay time 0.000~50.000s 0.000s P06.08 P06.09 P06.10 P06.11 P06.12 P06.13 P07.38 P17.13 HDO switching on delay time HDO switching off delay time RO1 switching on delay time RO1 switching off delay time RO2 switching on delay time RO2 switching off delay time 0.000~50.000s(valid only when only when P06.00=1) 0.000~50.000s(valid P06.00=1) 0.000s 0.000s 0.000~50.000s 0.000s 0.000~50.000s 0.000s 0.000~50.000s 0.000s 0.000~50.000s 0.000s Output terminals state at 0 the current fault Switch output terminals 0 state 7.13 Simple PLC Simple PLC function is also a multi-stage speed generator. The inverter can change the running frequency, direction to meet the need of processing according to the running time automatically. In the past, this function needs to be assisted by external PLC, but now the inverter can realize this function by itself. The series inverters can control 16-stage speed with 4 groups of ACC/DEC time. The multi-function digital output terminals or multi-function relay output an ON signal when the set PLC finishes a circle (or a stage). 195 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Digital output 15 Simple PLC stage completion 200ms Digital output 20 Simple PLC cycle completion 200ms Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Stop after running once P10.00 Simple PLC means 1:Run at the final value after running once 0 2:Cycle running P10.01 P10.02 P10.03 P10.04 P10.05 P10.06 P10.07 P10.08 P10.09 P10.10 P10.11 P10.12 P10.13 P10.14 P10.15 P10.16 Simple PLC memory selection Multi-stage speed 0 The running time of stage 0 Multi-stage speed 1 0:Power loss without memory 1:Power loss memory -100.0~100.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 1 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 2 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 2 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 3 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 3 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 4 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 4 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 5 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 5 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 6 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 6 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 7 -100.0~100.0% 196 0 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% Goodrive300 inverters Function code P10.17 P10.18 P10.19 P10.20 P10.21 P10.22 P10.23 P10.24 P10.25 P10.26 P10.27 P10.28 P10.29 P10.30 P10.31 P10.32 P10.33 P10.36 P10.34 P10.35 P05.01~P0 5.09 P06.01~P0 6.04 Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters The running time of stage 7 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 8 -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% The running time of stage 9 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 10 The running time of stage 10 Multi-stage speed 11 The running time of stage 11 Multi-stage speed 12 The running time of stage 12 Multi-stage speed 13 The running time of stage 13 Multi-stage speed 14 The running time of stage 14 Multi-stage speed 15 The running time of stage 15 PLC restart manner selection Simple PLC 0~7 stage ACC/DEC time selection Simple PLC 8~15 stage ACC/DEC time selection Digital input function selection Digital outnput function selection value 0.0s The running time of stage 8 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 9 Default 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0:Restart from the first stage 1:Continue to run from the stop 0 frequency 0x0000~0XFFFF 0000 0x0000~0XFFFF 0000 23:Simple PLC stop reset 24:Simple PLC pause 15: Underload pre-alarm 16:Completion of simple PLC stage 197 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P17.00 Basic operation instruction Name Set frequency Detailed instruction of parameters 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the frequency) Max. output Default value 0.00Hz Simple PLC and the P17.27 current stage of the multi-stage speed 7.14 Multi-stage speed running Set the parameters when the inverter carries out multi-stage speed running. Goodrive300 series inverters can set 16 stage speed which can be selected by the combination code of multi-stage speed terminals 1~4. They correspond to multi-stage speed 0 to 15. 198 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Relative parameters list: Function code P10.02 P10.03 Name Multi-stage speed 0 Multi-stage speed 1 P10.05 The running time of stage 1 P10.06 Multi-stage speed 2 P10.07 The running time of stage 2 P10.08 Multi-stage speed 3 P10.09 The running time of stage 3 P10.10 Multi-stage speed 4 P10.11 The running time of stage 4 P10.12 Multi-stage speed 5 P10.13 The running time of stage 5 P10.14 Multi-stage speed 6 P10.15 The running time of stage 6 P10.16 Multi-stage speed 7 P10.17 The running time of stage 7 P10.18 Multi-stage speed 8 P10.19 The running time of stage 8 P10.20 Multi-stage speed 9 P10.21 The running time of stage 9 P10.23 P10.24 P10.25 P10.26 P10.27 P10.28 P10.29 P10.30 P10.31 P10.32 P10.33 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 0 0.0~6553.5s(min) P10.04 P10.22 Detailed instruction of parameters Multi-stage speed 10 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 0.0~6553.5s(min) 0.0s -100.0~100.0% 0.0% -100.0~100.0% -100.0~100.0% -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 13 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 14 -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 14 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 15 0.0s 0.0~6553.5s(min) The running time of stage 12 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 13 0.0% 0.0% The running time of stage 11 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 12 value -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 10 0.0~6553.5s(min) Multi-stage speed 11 Default -100.0~100.0% The running time of stage 15 0.0~6553.5s(min) 199 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s 0.0% 0.0s Goodrive300 inverters Function Name code P10.34 P10.35 Basic operation instruction Simple PLC 0~7 stage ACC/DEC time selection Simple PLC 8~15 stage ACC/DEC time selection Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0x0000~0XFFFF 0000 0x0000~0XFFFF 0000 16:Multi-stage speed terminal 1 P05.01~ Digital input function P05.09 selection 17:Multi-stage speed terminal 2 18:Multi-stage speed terminal 3 19:Multi- stage speed terminal 4 20:Multi- stage speed pause Simple PLC and the current P17.27 stage of the multi-stage speed 7.15 PID control PID control is commonly used to control the procedure through the controlled procedure. Adjust the output frequency by proportional, integral, differential operation with the dispersion of the target signals to stabilize the value on the target. It is possible to apply to the flow, pressure and temperature control. Figure of basic control is as below: Simple illustration of the PID control operation and adjustment: 200 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Proportional adjustment (Kp): when there is an error between the feedback and the reference, a proportional adjustment will be output. If the error is constant, the adjustment will be constant, too. Proportional adjustment can respond to the feedback change quickly, but it can not realize non-fault control. The gain will increase with the adjustment speed, but too much gain may cause vibration. The adjustment method is: set a long integration time and derivation time to 0 first. Secondly make the system run by proportional adjustment and change the reference. And then watch the error of the feedback signal and the reference. If the static error is available (for example, increasing the reference, the feedback will be less than the reference after a stable system), continue to increase the gain, vice versa. Repeat the action until the static error achieves a little value. Integration time (Ti): the output adjustment will accumulate if there is an error between the feedback and the reference. The adjustment will keep on increasing until the error disappears. If the error is existent all the time, the integration adjustor can cancel the static error effectively. Vibration may occur as a result of unstable system caused by repeated over-adjustment if the integration adjustor is too strong. The features of this kind of vibration are: the fluctuating feedback signal (around the reference) and increasing traverse range will cause vibration. Adjust the integration time parameter from a big value to a little one to change the integration time and monitor the result until a stable system speed is available. Derivation time (Td): when the error between the feedback and the reference, a proportional adjustment will be output. The adjustment only depends on the direction and value of the error change other than the error itself. The derivation adjustment controls the change of feedback signals according to the changing trend when it fluctuates. Because the derivation may enlarge the interference to the system, especially the frequent-changing interference, please use it carefully. When P00.06, P00. 07=7 or P04.27=6, the running mode of the inverter is procedure PID control. 7.15.1 General steps of PID parameters setting: a Ensure the gain P When ensure the gain P, firstly cancel the PID integration and derivation (set Ti=0 and Td=0, see the PID parameter setting for detailed information) to make proportional adjustment is the only method to PID. Set the input as 60%~70% of the permitted Max. Value and increase gain P from 0 until the system vibration occurs, vice versa, and record the PID value and set it to 60%~70% of the current value. Then the gain P commission is finished. b Ensure the integration time After ensuring the gain P, set an original value of a bigger integration time and decrease it until the system vibration occurs, vice versa, until the system vibration disappear. Record the Ti and set the integration time to 150%~180% of the current value. Then integration time commission is finished. c Ensure the derivation time Generally, it is not necessary to set Td which is 0. If it needs to be set, set it to 30% of the value without vibration via the same method with P and Ti. 201 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction d Commission the system with and without load and then adjust the PID parameter until it is available. 7.15.2 PID inching After setting the PID control parameters, inching is possible by following means: Control the overshoot Shorten the derivation time and prolong the integration time when overshoot occurs. Achieve the stable state as soon as possible Shorten the integration time (Ti) and prolong the derivation time (Td) even the overshoot occurs, but the control should be stable as soon as possible. Control long vibration If the vibration periods are longer than the set value of integration time (Ti), it is necessary to prolong the integration time (Ti) to control the vibration for the strong integration. Control short vibration Short vibration period and the same set value with the derivation time (Td) mean that the derivation time is strong. Shortening the derivation time (Td) can control the vibration. When setting the derivation time as 0.00(ire no derivation control) is useless to control the vibration, decrease the gain. 202 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:Keypad digital given(P09.01) 1:Analog channel AI1 given 2:Analog channel AI2 given 3:Analog channel AI3 set P09.00 PID given source selection 4:Hhigh speed pulse HDI set 5:Multi-stage speed set 0 6:MODBUS communication set 7:PROFIBUS communication set 8:Ethernet communication set 9:CAN communication set P09.01 Keypad pre-setting PID given -100.0%~100.0% 0.0% 0:Analog channel AI1 feedback 1:Analog channel AI2 feedback 2:Analog channel AI3 feedback P09.02 PID feedback source Selection 3:High speed HDI feedback 4:MODBUS communication feedback 0 5:PROFIBUS communication feedback 6:Ethernet communication feedback 7:CAN communication feedback P09.03 P09.04 PID output feature 0:PID output is positive selection 1:PID output is negative 0 Proportional gain (Kp) 0.00~100.00 1.00 P09.05 Interval time(Ti) 0.00~10.00s 0.10s P09.06 Differential time(Td) 0.00~10.00s 0.00s P09.07 Sampling cycle(T) 0.00~100.00s 0.10s P09.08 PID control deviation limit 0.0~100.0% P09.09 Output upper limit of PID P09.10~100.0% (Max. Frequency or the 203 0.0% 100.0% Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value Max. Voltage) P09.10 P09.11 P09.12 Output lower limit of PID -100.0%~P09.09 (Max. Frequency or the Max. Voltage) Feedback offline detection 0.0~100.0% value Feedback offline detection 0.0~3600.0s time 0.0% 0.0% 1.0s 0x00~0x11 LED ones: 0:Keep the integral adjustment ON while the frequency achieves upper or lower limit. P09.13 PID adjustment selection 1:Stop the integral adjustment while the 0x00 frequency achieves the upper or lower limit LED tens: 0:The same with the setting direction 1:Opposite to the setting direction P17.00 Set frequency 0.00Hz~P00.03 (the Max. frequency) 0.00Hz P17.23 PID given value -100.0~100.0% 0.0% P17.24 PID response value -100.0~100.0% 0.0% 7.16 Traverse running Traverse is applied in some industries such as textile, chemical fiber and cases where traverse and convolution is required. The working flowchart is as below: 204 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function code P00.03 Name Max. output frequency Detailed instruction of parameters P00.03~400.00Hz Default value 50.00Hz 0:Keypad data setting 1:Analog AI1 setting 2:Analog AI2 setting 3:Analog AI3 setting 4:High-speed pulse HDI setting A frequency P00.06 5:Simple PLC program setting command 6: Multi-stage speed running setting selection 7: PID control setting 8:MODBUS communication setting 9:PROFIBUS communication setting 10:Ethernet communication setting(reserved) 11:CAN communication setting(reserved) 205 0 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function code Name P00.11 ACC time 1 Detailed instruction of parameters Default value Depend 0.0~3600.0s on model Depend P00.12 DEC time 1 0.0~3600.0s on model Digital input P05.01~P05.09 function selection P08.15 Traverse range 26:Traverse Pause(stop at the current frequency) 27:Traverse reset(return to the center frequency) 0.0~100.0%(relative to the set frequency) 0.0% 0.0~50.0%(relative to the traverse range) 0.0% 0.1~3600.0s 5.0s 0.1~3600.0s 5.0s Sudden jumping P08.16 frequency range P08.17 P08.18 Traverse boost time Traverse declining time 7.17 Pulse counter Goodrive300 series inverters support pulse counter which can input counting pulse through HDI terminal. When the actual length is longer than or equal to the set length, the digital output terminal can output length arrival pulse signal and the corresponding length will clear automatically. 206 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P05.00 Basic operation instruction Name HDI input type selection HDI high-speed pulse P05.40 input function selection P05.01~ P05.09 P06.01~ P06.04 Digital input function selection Digital output function selection Detailed instruction of parameters 0:HDI is high pulse input 1:HDI is switch input Default value 0 0:Frequency setting input 1:Counter input 0 2:Length counting input 28:Counter reset 31:Counter trigger 17:Completion of simple PLC cycle 18:Setting count value arrival P08.25 Setting counting value P08.26~65535 0 P08.26 Given counting value 0~P08.25 0 P17.18 Counting value 0~65535 0 207 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction 7.18 Fixed-length control Goodrive300 series inverters support fixed-length control function which can input length counting pulse through HDI, and then count the actual length according to the internal counting formula. If the actual length is longer than or equal to the set length, the digital output terminal can output the length arrival pulse signal of 200ms and the corresponding length will clear automatically. Note: the length arrival belongs to pulse output and the lasting time is 200ms. Function code P05.00 Name HDI input type selection HDI high-speed pulse P05.40 input function selection P05.01~ P05.09 P06.01~ P06.04 Digital input function selection Digital output function Detailed instruction of parameters 0:HDI is high pulse input 1:HDI is switch input Default value 0 0:Frequency setting input 1:Counter input 2:Length counting input 32: Length reset 20: Length arrival selection 208 0 Goodrive300 inverters Basic operation instruction Function Name code P08.19 Detailed instruction of parameters Default value Set length 0~65535m 0 P08.20 Actual length 0~65535m 0 P08.21 Pulse number per 1~10000 1 revolution P08.22 Axis perimeter 0.01~100.00cm 10.00cm P08.23 Length times 0.001~10.000 1.000 P08.24 Length correcting 0.001~1.000 1.000 coefficient P17.17 Length 0~65535 0 7.19 Fault procedure Goodrive300 series inverters provide sufficient fault procedure information for the convenience of user’s application. Relative parameters list: Function code Name Detailed instruction of parameters Default value 0:No fault P07.27 Current fault type 1:IGBT U phase protection(OUt1) 2:IGBT V phase protection(OUt2) 209 0 Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters 3:IGBT W phase protection(OUt3) 4:OC1 5:OC2 6:OC3 7:OV1 8:OV2 9:OV3 10:UV 11:Motor overload(OL1) 12:The inverter overload(OL2) 13:Input side phase loss(SPI) 14:Output side phase loss(SPO) 15:Overheating of the rectifier module(OH1) 16:Overheating fault of the inverter module(OH2) 17:External fault(EF) 18:485 communication fault(CE) 19:Current detection fault(ItE) 20:Motor antotune fault(tE) 21:EEPROM operation fault(EEP) 22:PID response offline fault(PIDE) 23:Braking unit fault(bCE) 24:Running time arrival(END) 25:Electrical overload(OL3) 26:Panel communication fault(PCE) 27:Parameter uploading fault (UPE) 28:Parameter downloading fault(DNE) 29:Profibus communication fault(E-DP) 30:Ethernet communication fault(E-NET) 31:CAN communication fault(E-CAN) 32:Grounding short circuit fault 1(ETH1) 33:Grounding short circuit fault 2(ETH2) 34:Speed deviation fault(dEu) 35:Maladjustment(STo) 210 Default value Goodrive300 inverters Function code Basic operation instruction Name P07.28 Previous fault type P07.29 Previous 2 fault type P07.30 Previous 3 fault type P07.31 Previous 4 fault type P07.32 P07.33 P07.34 P07.35 P07.36 P07.37 P07.38 P07.39 P07.40 P07.41 P07.42 P07.43 P07.44 P07.45 P07.46 P07.47 Detailed instruction of parameters Default value Previous 5 fault type Current fault running 0.00Hz frequency Ramp given frequency at 0.00Hz current fault Output voltage at the 0V current fault Current fault output 0.0A current Current fault bus voltage 0.0V The Max. temperature at 0.0℃ Current fault Input terminals state at the 0 current fault Output terminals state at 0 the current fault Previous fault running 0.00Hz frequency Ramp reference 0.00Hz frequency at previous fault Output voltage at the 0V previous fault Output current at the 0.0A previous fault Bus voltage at the 0.0V previous fault The Max. temperature at 0.0℃ the previous fault Input terminals state at the 0 previous fault 211 Goodrive300 inverters Function code P07.48 P07.49 P07.50 P07.51 P07.52 P07.53 P07.54 P07.55 P07.56 Basic operation instruction Name Detailed instruction of parameters Output terminals state at Default value 0 the previous fault Previous 2 fault running 0.00Hz frequency Ramp given frequency at 0.00Hz the previous 2 fault Output voltage at the 0V previous 2 fault Output current at the 0.0A previous 2 fault Bus voltage at the 0.0V previous 2 fault The Max. temperature at 0.0℃ previous 2 fault Input terminals state at 0 previous 2 fault Output terminals state at 0 previous 2 fault 212 Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking Fault tracking 8 8.1 What this chapter contains This chapter tells how to reset faults and view fault history. It also lists all alarm and fault messages including the possible cause and corrective actions. Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the inverter. Read the safety instructions in chapter Safety precautions before working on the inverter. 8.2 Alarm and fault indications Fault is indicated by LEDs. See Operation Procedure. When TRIP light is on, an alarm or fault message on the panel display indicates abnormal inverter state. Using the information given in this chapter, most alarm and fault cause can be identified and corrected. If not, contact with the INVT office. 8.3 How to reset The inverter can be reset by pressing the keypad key STOP/RST, through digital input, or by switching the power light. When the fault has been removed, the motor can be restarted. 8.4 Fault history Function codes P07.25~P07.30 store 6 recent faults. Function codes P07.31~P07.38, P07.39~P7.46, P07.47~P07.54 show drive operation data at the time the latest 3 faults occurred. 8.5 Fault instruction and solution Do as the following after the inverter fault: 1. Check to ensure there is nothing wrong with the kepad. If not, please contact with the local INVT office. 2. If there is nothing wrong, please check P07 and ensure the corresponding recorded fault parameters to confirm the real state when the current fault occurs by all parameters. 3. See the following table for detailed solution and check the corresponding abnormal state. 4. Eliminate the fault and ask for relative help. 5. Check to eliminate the fault and carry out fault reset to run the inverter. 213 Goodrive300 inverters Fault code OUt1 Fault type Possible cause Inverter module 1. The acceleration is too U phase protection OUt2 Fault tracking 1. Increase Acc time. fast. 2. There is damage to the 2. Change the power unit. Inverter module V internal phase protection phase. of the 3. Check the driving wires. to IGBT 4. Check if there is strong of the interference to the external 3.The connection OUt3 Inverter module W phase protection OC1 OC2 What to do equipment. driving wires is not good, 4.The grounding is not good Accelerating 1. The acceleration or 1. Increase the ACC time 2. Check the input power Overcurrent deceleration is too fast. Decelerating 2. The voltage of the grid is 3. Select the inverter with a overcurrent too low. larger power The power of the inverter is Check if the load is short too low. circuited (the grounding The load transients or is short circuited or the wire abnormal. OC3 Constant overcurrent The short grounding is circuited) circuited or the output is Check phase loss. or the short rotation is not smooth. the output configuration. There is strong external Check if there is strong interference. OV1 OV2 interference. Accelerating 1. Check the input power overvoltage 2. Check if the DEC time of Decelerating 1. The input overvoltage abnormal. voltage is the load is to short or the inverter starts during the 2. There is large energy rotation of the motor or it OV3 Constant feedback. needs to increase the energy consumption overvoltage components. UV Undervoltage fault The voltage of the power Check the input power of of the Bus supply is too low. 214 the supply line Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 1. The voltage of the power 1. Check the power of the supply is too low. Overload of the OL1 motor supply line 2. The motor setting rated 2. Reset the rated current of current is incorrect. the motor 3. The motor stall or load 3. Check the load and adjust transients is too strong. the torque lift 1. The acceleration is too fast 1. Increase the ACC time 2. Reset the rotating motor 2. Avoid the restarting after 3. The voltage of the power stopping. OL2 Overload of the inverter supply is too low. 3. Check the power of the 4. The load is too heavy. supply line 5. Close loop vector control, 4. Select an inverter with reverse direction of the code bigger power. panel and long low-speed 5. Select a proper motor. operation The OL3 inverter will Electrical overload overload report pre-alarm according to the set value. SPI SPO Phase loss of the input side Phase loss of the supply side Phase loss or fluctuation of input R,S,T serious asymmetrical three 2. Check installation 1. Check the output distribution cable or fan 1. Refer to the overcurrent Rectifying module damage overheated 1. Check input power 2. Check the motor and phase of the load) OH1 overload pre-alarm point. distribution U,V,W phase loss input(or 1. Air duct jam Check the load and the solution 2. Ambient temperature is 2. Redistribute too high. dredge the wind channel or 215 Goodrive300 inverters OH2 Fault tracking Inverting module overheated EF Outside fault SI external fault input Check the external device terminals action input 1. The baud rate setting is incorrect. 2. 485 CE communication fault Fault occurs to the The communication address is wrong. 4. There interference is strong to 2. Check the communication connection distribution 3. communication wiring. 3. 1. Set proper baud rate the communication. Set proper communication address. 4. Chang or replace the connection distribution improve or the anti-interference capability. 1. The connection of the Current-detecting ItE fault control board is not good 1. Check the connector and 2. Assistant power is bad repatch 3. Hoare components is 2. Change the Hoare broken 3. Change the main control 4. The modifying circuit is panel abnormal. 1. The motor capacity does not comply with the inverter capability 2. The rated parameter of Motor-autotuning tE fault the motor does not set correctly. 3. The offset between the parameters from autotune and the standard parameter 1. Change the inverter mode 2. Set the ratedparameter according to the motor name plate 3. Empty the motor load and reindentify 4. Check connection the and motor set the parameter. 5. Check if the upper limit is huge 4. Autotune overtime 216 frequency is above 2/3 of the rated frequency. Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 1. Error of controlling the EEP EEPROM operation fault write and read of the parameters 2. Damage to EEPROM PIDE PID feedback outline fault 1. PID feedback offline 2. PID feedback source disappear 1. Press STOP/RST to reset 2. Change the main control panel 1. Check the PID feedback signal 2. Check the PID feedback source 1. Braking circuit fault or damage to the braking pipes bCE Braking unit fault 2. The external braking resistor is not sufficient 1. Check the braking unit and , change new braking pipe 2. Increase the braking resistor 1. The output of the inverter 1. Check if the connection of Grounding ETH1 shortcut fault 1 is short circuited with the the motor is normal or not ground. 2. Change the Hoare 2. There is fault in the 3. Change the main control current detection circuit. panel 1. The output of the inverter 1. Check if the connection of Grounding ETH2 shortcut fault 2 is short circuited with the the motor is normal or not ground. 2. Change the Hoare 2. There is fault in the 3. Change the main control current detection circuit. panel 1. Check the load and ensure it is normal. Increase Velocity deviation dEu fault The load is too heavy or the detection time. stalled. 2. Check control normal. 217 whether the parameters are Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 1. The control parameters of the synchronous motors not STo Maladjustment fault set properly. 2. The autoturn parameter is The Check the load and ensure it is normal. 2. Check control whether parameter is the set properly or not. not right. 3. 1. inverter is not connected to the motor. 3. Increase maladjustment the detection time. END Running time arrival The actual running time of Ask for the supplier and the inverter is above the adjust the setting running internal setting running time. time. 1. The connection of the keypad wires is not good or broken. PCE Keypad 2. The keypad wire is too communication long and affected by strong fault interference. 3. There is circuit fault on the communication of the 1. Check the keypad wires and ensure whether there is mistake. 2. Check the environment and avoid the interference source. 3. Change the hardware and ask for service. keypad and main board. 1. The connection of the 1. Check the keypad wires keypad wires is not good or and ensure whether there is broken. DNE Parameters downloading fault mistake. 2. The keypad wire is too 2. Change the hardware and long and affected by strong ask for service. interference. 3. Repack-up the data in the 3. There is mistake on the keypad. data storage of the keypad. LL Electronic underload fault The inverter will report the underload pre-alarm according to the set value. 218 Check the load and the underload pre-alarm point. Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 1. Communication address Profibus E-DP communication fault is not correct. 2. Corresponding resistor is not dialed Check related setting 3. The files of main stop GSD does not set sound 4. The Ethernet address is Ethernet E-NET communication fault not set right. 1. Check the relative setting. 5. The Ethernet Check the communication communication is not method selection. selected to right. 2. Check the environment 6. The ambient interference and avoid the interference. is too strong. 1. The connection is not CAN E-CAN communication fault sound 1. Check the connection 2. Corresponding resistor is 2. Draw out the correspond resistor not dialed 3. The communication is 3. Set the same baud rate uneven 8.6 Common fault analysis 8.6.1 The motor does not work 219 Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 8.6.2 Motor vibration 220 Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 8.6.3 Overvoltage 8.6.4 Undervoltage fault 221 Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 8.6.5 Abnormal heating of the motor Check if there is abnormal heat to the motor Check if the parameter is No right or not Set right motor parameters Yes Check if it needs to carry out parameter autotune No Parameter autotune Yes Check if the inverter runs at low speed all the time Yes Check if it is frequency- No invertering motor Select right motor Yes Check if the load is too Yes heavy Low the load No Check if the 3-phase motor is balance No Change the motor Yes Set proper carrier frequency Yes Add output filter Yes Check if the carrier frequency is too low No Check if the motor wire is too long No If the it is the inverter fault, please contact with our company 222 Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 8.6.6 Overheat of the inverter 8.6.7 Speed loss during the acceleration of the motor Speed loss occurs to the inverter during ACC Check if the ACC time is too short Y e s Increase the ACC time N o Check if the voltage between the terminals is among the range N o Check if the load and inertia is too big Y e s Y e s N o Reduce the torque of the load and increase the capacity of the inverter Y e s Check if the load torque is too big Y e s Check if it is V/F control Thicken the motor cables and shorten the configuration distance and adjust the voltage of the reactor Check if the motor is special N o Reduce the inertia of the load and increase the capacity of the inverter N o If the it is the inverter fault or interference, please contact with our company N o Check if the torque boost is too high Y e s Modify the torque boost N o Check if it performs parameter autotune Y e s If the it is the inverter fault or interference, please contact with our company 223 N o Overcurrent Y e s Contact with our company Goodrive300 inverters Fault tracking 8.6.8 Overcurrent Overcurrent Check if UVW is short circuited to Y the earth e Remove the motor cable and s ensure if there is connected with the earth. Settle the short circuit problem and configure the motor cables rightly N o Check if the motor is short circuited to the earth N o Check if the motor type and parameters are right Y e s Check if it needs parameters autotune Y e s Check if the ACC/DEC time is too short Y e s N o Change the motor Set right motor type and parameters N o Parameters autotune Y e s Adjust the ACC/DEC time N o Check if the load is too heavy Y e s Reduce the load and increase the capacity of the inverter N o Check if there is interference source Decrease the torque boost Y e s Check if the torque boost is too big Adjust the V/F curve Check if the multi-dots V/F curve is set rightly N o Set right V/F vibration control parameters Y e s Check if there is abnormal vibration to the motor N o Clear the interference source N o Y e s Check if it is V/F control N o Y e s Y e s N o Check if the parameter of current loop and speed loop are right Y e s If the it is the inverter fault, please contact with our company If the it is the inverter fault, please contact with our company 224 N o Set right parameters of current loop and speed loop Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9 9.1 What this chapter contains. The chapter contains preventive maintenance instructions of the inverter. 9.2 Maintenance intervals If installed in an appropriate environment, the inverter requires very little maintenance. The table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by INVT. Checking part Checking Checking item Check the ambient temperature, humidity and vibration and ensure there is no dust, gas, oil Ambient environment fog and water drop. Ensure there are no tools or other foreign or dangerous objects Visual examination Conforming and instrument the manual and control circuit are normal. test There clear enough tools examination dangerous millimeter examination characters Visual are displayed totally Main circuit For public use Ensure the screws are tightened securility Ensure distortion, damage there is or color-changing caused by The characters are displayed normally. Conforming the manual Tighten up NA no Visual to the manual examination crackles, examination 225 no or Measurement by Conforming Keypad the are Visual Ensure the display is Visual Ensure to objects. Ensure the main circuit Voltage Criterion method NA to Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Checking part Checking Checking item Criterion method overheating and aging to the machine and insulator. NA Note: if the color of copper blocks change, it Ensure there is no dust Visual and dirtiness the does not mean examination that there is something wrong with the features. Ensure that there is no distortion or color-changing The lead of the conductors conductors of caused the by NA Visual examination overheating. NA Ensure that there are no crackles or Visual color-changing of the examination protective layers. Terminals seat NA Ensure that there is no Visual damage examination NA Ensure that there is no Filter capacitors weeping, color-changing, Visual crackles and cassis examination expansion. NA Ensure the safety valve is Estimate in the right place. usage the time according to the 226 maintenance or Goodrive300 inverters Checking part Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Checking Checking item Criterion method measure the static capacity. The If necessary, measure the static capacity. Measure capacity static the capacity is by above or equal instruments. to the original value *0.85. Ensure whether there is Smelling and NA replacement and splitting visual caused by overheating. examination Visual examination Resistors Ensure that there is no offline. remove or one The resistors are ending to in ±10% of the coagulate or standard value. measure with multimeters Transformers and reactors Ensure there is no abnormal vibration, noise Hearing, smelling examination NA Ensure whether there is contactors and relays noise in the Hearing workrooms. Ensure the contactor is Visual good enough. Control circuit PCB and plugs NA visual and smelling, Electromagnetism vibration and NA examination Ensure there is no loose NA Fasten up screws and contactors. Ensure there smelling is no Smelling and visual color-changing. 227 examination and NA Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Checking part Checking Checking item Criterion method Ensure there crackles, are no damage NA Visual examination distortion and rust. NA Visual examination Ensure there is no estimate weeping and distortion to usage the capacitors. or the time according to the maintenance information Estimate whether there is abnormal noise and vibration. Estimate Hearing examination or there is no losses screw. NA Tighten up NA Visual examination Cooling Ensure Stable rotation rotate with hand Cooling fan system and Visual there is no estimate color-changing caused by usage overheating. or the time according to the maintenance information Ensure whether there is Ventilating duct NA stuff or foreign objection Visual in the cooling fan, air examination vent. Consult the local INVT Service representative for more details on the maintenance. Visit the official website of INVT: http://www.invt.com.cn and select Inverter Services – Maintenance and Field Services. 228 Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9.3 Cooling fan The inverter’s cooling fan has a minimum life span of 25,000 operating hours. The actual life span depends on the inverter usage and ambient temperature. The operating hours can be found through P07.15 (accumulative hours of the inverter). Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from the fan bearings. If the inverter is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms appear. Replacement fans are available from INVT. Replacing the cooling fan Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety Precautions. Ignoring the instructions would cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. 1. Stop the inverter and disconnect it from the AC power source and wait for at least the time designated on the inverter. 2. Lever the fan holder off the drive frame with a screwdriver and lift the hinged fan holder slightly upward from its front edge. 3. Free the fan cable from the clip. 4. Disconnect the fan cable. 5. Remove the fan holder from the hinges. 6. Install the new fan holder including the fan in reverse order. 7. Restore power. 9.4 Capacitors 9.4.1 Reforming the capacitors The DC bus capacitors must be reformed according to the operation instruction if the inverter has been stored for a long time. The storing time is counted form the producing date other than the delivery data which has been marked in the serial number of the inverter. Time Storing time less than 1 Operational principle Operation without charging year Storing time 1-2 years Connect with the power for 1 hour before first ON command Use power surge to charge for the inverter Storing time 2-3 years • Add 25% rated voltage for 30 minutes • Add 50% rated voltage for 30 minutes 229 Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics Time Operational principle • Add 75% rated voltage for 30 minutes • Add 100% rated voltage for 30 minutes Use power surge to charge for the inverter Storing time more than 3 years • Add 25% rated voltage for 2 hours • Add 50% rated voltage for 2 hours • Add 75% rated voltage for 2 hours • Add 100% rated voltage for 2 hours The method of using power surge to charge for the inverter: The right selection of Power surge depends on the supply power of the inverter. Single phase 230V AC/2A power surge applied to the inverter with single/three-phase 230V AC as its input voltage. The inverter with single/three-phase 230V AC as its input voltage can apply Single phase 230V AC/2A power surge. All DC bus capacitors charge at the same time because there is one rectifier. High-voltage inverter needs enough voltage (for example, 400V) during charging. The small capacitor power (2A is enough) can be used because the capacitor nearly does not need current when charging. The operation method of inverter charging through resistors (LEDs): The charging time is at least 60 minutes if charge the DC bus capacitor directly through supply power. This operation is available on normal temperature and no-load condition and the resistor should be serially connected in the 3-phase circuits of the power supply: 400V driven device: 1k/100W resistor. LED of 100W can be used when the power voltage is no more than 400V. But if used, the light may be off or weak during charging. 400V charging illustration of the driven device 230 Goodrive300 inverters Maintenance and hardware diagnostics 9.4.2 Change electrolytic capacitors Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety Precautions. Ignoring the instructions may cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. Change electrolytic capacitors if the working hours of electrolytic capacitors in the inverter are above 35000. Please contact with the local INVT offices or diall our national service hotline (400-700-9997) for detailed operation. 9.5 Power cable Read and follow the instructions in chapter Safety Precautions. Ignoring the instructions may cause physical injury or death, or damage to the equipment. 1. Stop the drive and disconnect it from the power line. Wait for at least the time designated on the inverter. 2. Check the tightness of the power cable connections. 3. Restore power. 231 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol Communication protocol 10 10.1 What this chapter contains This chapter describes the communication protocol of Goodrive300 series inverters. The Goodrive300 series inverters provide RS485 communication interface. It adopts international standard ModBus communication protocol to perform master-slave communication. The user can realize centralized control through PC/PLC, upper control PC, etc. (set the control command, running frequency of the inverter, modify relevant function codes, monitor and control the operating state and fault information of the inverter and so on) to adapt specific application requirements. 10.2 Brief instruction to Modbus protocol Modbus protocol is a software protocol and common language which is applied in the electrical controller. With this protocol, the controller can communicate with other devices via network (the channel of signal transmission or the physical layer, such as RS485). And with this industrial standard, the controlling devices of different manufacturers can be connected to an industrial network for the convenient of being monitored. There are two transmission modes for Modbus protocol: ASCII mode and RTU (Remote Terminal Units) mode. On one Modbus network, all devices should select same transmission mode and their basic parameters, such as baud rate, digital bit, check bit, and stopping bit should have no difference. Modbus network is a controlling network with single-master and multiple slaves, which means that there is only one device performs as the master and the others are the slaves on one Modbus network. The master means the device which has active talking right to sent message to Modbus network for the controlling and inquiring to other devices. The slave means the passive device which sends data message to the Modbus network only after receiving the controlling or inquiring message (command) form the master (response). After the master sends message, there is a period of time left for the controlled or inquired slaves to response, which ensure there is only one slave sends message to the master at a time for the avoidance of singles impact. Generally, the user can set PC, PLC, IPC and HMI as the masters to realize central control. Setting certain device as the master is a promise other than setting by a bottom or a switch or the device has a special message format. For example, when the upper monitor is 232 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol running, if the operator clicks sending command bottom, the upper monitor can send command message actively even it can not receive the message form other devices. In this case, the upper monitor is the master. And if the designer makes the inverter send the data only after receiving the command, then the inverter is the slave. The master can communicate with any single slave or with all slaves. For the single-visiting command, the slave should feedback a response message; for the broadcasting message from the master, the slave does not need to feedback the response message. 10.3 Application of the inverter The Modbus protocol of the inverter is RTU mode and the physical layer is 2-wire RS485. 10.3.1 2-wire RS485 The interface of 2-wire RS485 works on semiduplex and its data signal applies differential transmission which is called balance transmission, too. It uses twisted pairs, one of which is defined as A (+) and the other is defined as B (-). Generally, if the positive electrical level between sending drive A and B is among +2~+6V, it is logic“1”,if the electrical level is among -2V~-6V, it is logic“0”. 485+ on the terminal board corresponds to A and 485- to B. Communication baud rate means the binary bit number in one second. The unit is bit/s (bps). The higher the baud rate is, the quicker the transmission speed is and the weaker the anti-interference is. If the twisted pairs of 0.56mm(24AWG)is applied as the communication cables, the Max. Transmission distance is as below: Baud rate Max. transmission Baud rate distance Max. transmission distance 2400BPS 1800m 9600BPS 800m 4800BPS 1200m 19200BPS 600m It is recommended to use shield cables and make the shield layer as the grounding wires during RS485 remote communication. In the cases with less devices and shorter distance, it is recommended to use 120Ω terminal resistor as the performance will be weakened if the distance increase even though the network can perform well without load resistor. 10.3.2.1 Single application Figure 1 is the site Modbus connection figure of single inverter and PC. Generally, the computer does not have RS485 interface, the RS232 or USB interface of the computer should be converted into RS485 by converter. Connect the A terminal of RS485 to the 485+ 233 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol terminal of the inverter and B to the 485- terminal. It is recommended to use the shield twisted pairs. When applying RS232-RS485 converter, if the RS232 interface of the computer is connected to the RS232 interface of the converter, the wire length should be as short as possible within the length of 15m. It is recommended to connect the RS232-RS485 converter to the computer directly. If using USB-RS485 converter, the wire should be as short as possible, too. Select a right interface to the upper monitor of the computer (select the interface of RS232-RS485 converter, such as COM1) after the wiring and set the basic parameters such as communication baud rate and digital check bit to the same as the inverter. Figure 1 RS485 physical connection in single application 10.3.1.2 Multi-applicationIn the real multi-application, the chrysanthemum connection and star connection are commonly used. Chrysanthemum chain connection is required in the RS485 industrial fieldbus standards. The two ends are connected to terminal resistors of 120Ω which is shown as figure 2. Figure 3 is the simply connection figure and figure 4 is the real application figure. Fugure 2 Chrysanthemum connection 234 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol Figure 3 Chrysanthemum connection Figure 4 Chrysanthemum connection applications Figure 5 is the star connection. Terminal resistor should be connected to the two devices which have the longest distance. (1# and 15#device) Figure 5 star connection It is recommended to use shield cables in multiple connection. The basic parameter of the devices, such as baud rate and digital check bit in RS485 should be the same and there should be no repeated address. 10.3.2 RTU mode 10.3.2.1 RTU communication frame format If the controller is set to communicate by RTU mode in Modbus network every 8bit byte in the message includes two 4Bit hex characters. Compared with ACSII mode, this mode can 235 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol send more data at the same baud rate. Code system · 1 start bit · 7 or 8 digital bit, the minimum valid bit can be sent firstly. Every 8 bit frame includes two hex characters (0...9, A...F) · 1 even/odd check bit . If there is no checkout, the even/odd check bit is inexistent. · 1 end bit (with checkout), 2 Bit(no checkout) Error detection field · CRC The data format is illustrated as below: 11-bit character frame (BIT1~BIT8 are the digital bits) Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7 BIT8 Check bit End bit 10-bit character frame (BIT1~BIT7 are the digital bits) Start bit BIT1 BIT2 BIT3 BIT4 BIT5 BIT6 BIT7 Check bit End bit In one character frame, the digital bit takes effect. The start bit, check bit and end bit is used to send the digital bit right to the other device. The digital bit, even/odd checkout and end bit should be set as the same in real application. The Modbus minimum idle time between frames should be no less than 3.5 bytes. The network device is detecting, even during the interval time, the network bus. When the first field (the address field) is received, the corresponding device decodes next transmitting character. When the interval time is at least 3.5 byte, the message ends. The whole message frame in RTU mode is a continuous transmitting flow. If there is an interval time (more than 1.5 bytes) before the completion of the frame, the receiving device will renew the uncompleted message and suppose the next byte as the address field of the new message. As such, if the new message follows the previous one within the interval time of 3.5 bytes, the receiving device will deal with it as the same with the previous message. If these two phenomena all happen during the transmission, the CRC will generate a fault message to respond to the sending devices. The standard structure of RTU frame: START ADDR T1-T2-T3-T4(transmission time of 3.5 bytes) Communication address: 0~247(decimal system)(0 is the broadcast address) 236 Goodrive300 inverters CMD Communication protocol 03H:read slave parameters 06H:write slave parameters DATA (N-1) The data of 2*N bytes are the main content of the communication as … well as the core of data exchanging DATA (0) CRC CHK low bit Detection value:CRC (16BIT) CRC CHK high bit END T1-T2-T3-T4(transmission time of 3.5 bytes) 10.3.2.1 RTU communication frame error checkout Various factors (such as electromagnetic interference) may cause error in the data transmission. For example, if the sending message is a logic “1”,A-B potential difference on RS485 should be 6V, but in reality, it may be -6V because of electromagnetic interference, and then the other devices take the sent message as logic“0”. If there is no error checkout, the receiving devices will not find the message is wrong and they may give incorrect response which cause serious result. So the checkout is essential to the message. The theme of checkout is that: the sender calculate the sending data according to a fixed formula, and then send the result with the message. When the receiver gets this message, they will calculate anther result according to the same method and compare it with the sending one. If two results are the same, the message is correct. If not, the message is incorrect. The error checkout of the frame can be divided into two parts: the bit checkout of the byte and the whole data checkout of the frame (CRC check). Bit checkout of the byte The user can select different bit checkouts or non-checkout, which impacts the check bit setting of each byte. The definition of even checkout: add an even check bit before the data transmission to illustrate the number of “1” in the data transmission is odd number or even number. When it is even, the check byte is “0”, otherwise, the check byte is”1”. This method is used to stabilize the parity of the data. The definition of odd checkout: add an odd check bit before the data transmission to illustrate the number of “1” in the data transmission is odd number or even number. When it is odd, the check byte is “0”, otherwise, the check byte is”1”. This method is used to stabilize the parity of the data. For example, when transmitting “11001110”, there are five “1” in the data. If the even 237 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol checkout is applied, the even check bit is “1”; if the odd checkout is applied; the odd check bit is “0”. The even and odd check bit is calculated on the check bit position of the frame. And the receiving devices also carry out even and odd checkout. If the parity of the receiving data is different from the setting value, there is an error in the communication. CRC check The checkout uses RTU frame format. The frame includes the frame error detection field which is based on the CRC calculation method. The CRC field is two bytes, including 16 figure binary values. It is added into the frame after calculated by transmitting device. The receiving device recalculates the CRC of the received frame and compares them with the value in the received CRC field. If the two CRC values are different, there is an error in the communication. During CRC, 0*FFFF will be stored. And then, deal with the continuous 6-above bytes in the frame and the value in the register. Only the 8Bit data in every character is effective to CRC, while the start bit, the end and the odd and even check bit is ineffective. The calculation of CRC applies the international standard CRC checkout principles. When the user is editing CRC calculation, he can refer to the relative standard CRC calculation to write the required CRC calculation program. Here provided a simple function of CRC calculation for the reference (programmed with C language): unsigned int crc_cal_value(unsigned char *data_value,unsigned char data_length) { int i; unsigned int crc_value=0xffff; while(data_length--) { crc_value^=*data_value++; for(i=0;i<8;i++) { if(crc_value&0x0001)crc_value=(crc_value>>1)^0xa001; else crc_value=crc_value>>1; } } return(crc_value); } In ladder logic, CKSM calculated the CRC value according to the frame with the table inquiry. 238 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol The method is advanced with easy program and quick calculation speed. But the ROM space the program occupied is huge. So use it with caution according to the program required space. 10.4 RTU command code and communication data illustration 10.4.1 command code:03H 03H(correspond to binary 0000 0011),read N words(Word)(the Max. continuous reading is 16 words) Command code 03H means that if the master read data form the inverter, the reading number depends on the “data number” in the command code. The Max. continuous reading number is 16 and the parameter address should be continuous. The byte length of every data is 2 (one word). The following command format is illustrated by hex (a number with “H” means hex) and one hex occupies one byte. The command code is used to read the working stage of the inverter. For example, read continuous 2 data content from0004H from the inverter with the address of 01H (read the content of data address of 0004H and 0005H), the frame structure is as below: RTU master command message (from the master to the inverter) START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 01H CMD 03H High bit of the start bit 00H Low bit of the start bit 04H High bit of data number 00H Low bit of data number 02H CRC low bit 85H CRC high bit CAH END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) T1-T2-T3-T4 between START and END is to provide at least the time of 3.5 bytes as the leisure time and distinguish two messages for the avoidance of taking two messages as one message. ADDR = 01H means the command message is sent to the inverter with the address of 01H and ADDR occupies one byte CMD=03H means the command message is sent to read data form the inverter and CMD 239 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol occupies one byte “Start address” means reading data form the address and it occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind. “Data number” means the reading data number with the unit of word. If the “start address’ is 0004H and the “data number” is 0002H, the data of 0004H and 0005H will be read. CRC occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind. RTU slave response message (from the inverter to the master) START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 01H CMD 03H Byte number 04H Data high bit of address 0004H 13H Data low bit of address 0004H 88H Data high bit of address 0005H 00H Data low bit of address 0005H 00H CRC CHK low bit 7EH CRC CHK high bit 9DH END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) The meaning of the response is that: ADDR = 01H means the command message is sent to the inverter with the address of 01H and ADDR occupies one byte CMD=03H means the message is receiced from the inverter to the master for the response of reading command and CMD occupies one byte “Byte number” means all byte number from the byte (excluding the byte) to CRC byte(excluding the byte). 04 means there are 4 byte of data from the “byte number” to “CRC CHK low bit”, which are “digital address 0004H high bit”, “digital address 0004H low bit”, “digital address 0005H high bit” and “digital address 0005H low bit”. There are 2 bytes stored in one data with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind of the message, the data of data address 0004H is 1388H,and the data of data address 0005H is 0000H. CRC occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind. 240 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol 10.4.2 Command code:06H 06H(correspond to binary 0000 0110), write one word(Word) The command means that the master write data to the inverter and one command can write one data other than multiple dates. The effect is to change the working mode of the inverter. For example, write 5000 (1388H) to 0004H from the inverter with the address of 02H, the frame structure is as below: RTU master command message (from the master to the inverter) START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 02H CMD 06H High bit of writing data address 00H Low bit of writing data address 04H data content 13H data content 88H CRC CHK low bit C5H CRC CHK high bit 6EH END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) RTU slave response message (from the inverter to the master) START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 02H CMD 06H High bit of writing data address 00H Low bit of writing data address 04H High bit of data content 13H Low bit of data content 88H CRC CHK low bit C5H CRC CHK high bit 6EH END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) Note: section 10.2 and 10.3 mainly describe the command format, and the detailed 241 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol application will be mentioned in 10.8 with examples. 10.4.3 Command code 08H for diagnosis Meaning of sub-function codes Sub-function Code Description 0000 Return to inquire information data For example: The inquiry information string is same as the response information string when the loop detection to address 01H of driver is carried out. The RTU request command is: START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 01H CMD 08H High byte of sub-function code 00H Low byte of sub-function code 00H High byte of data content 12H Low byte of data content ABH Low byte of CRC ADH High byte of CRC END 14H T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) The RTU response command is: START T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) ADDR 01H CMD 08H High byte of sub-function code 00H Low byte of sub-function code 00H High byte of data content 12H Low byte of data content ABH Low byte of CRC ADH High byte of CRC 14H END T1-T2-T3-T4 (transmission time of 3.5 bytes) 10.4.4 The definition of data address The address definition of the communication data in this part is to control the running of the inverter and get the state information and relative function parameters of the inverter. 242 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol 10.4.4.1 The rules of parameter address of the function codes The parameter address occupies 2 bytes with the fact that the high bit is in the front and the low bit is in the behind. The range of high and low byte are: high byte—00~ffH; low byte— 00~ffH. The high byte is the group number before the radix point of the function code and the low byte is the number after the radix point. But both the high byte and the low byte should be changed into hex. For example P05.05, the group number before the radix point of the function code is 05, then the high bit of the parameter is 05, the number after the radix point 05, then the low bit of the parameter is 05, then t he function code address is 0505H and the parameter address of P10.01 is 0A01H. Note: P29 group is the factory parameter which can not be read or changed. Some parameters can not be changed when the inverter is in the running state and some parameters can not be changed in any state. The setting range, unit and relative instructions should be paid attention to when modifying the function code parameters. Besides, EEPROM is stocked frequently, which may shorten the usage time of EEPROM. For users, some functions are not necessary to be stocked on the communication mode. The needs can be met on by changing the value in RAM. Changing the high bit of the function code form 0 to 1 can also realize the function. For example, the function code P00.07 is not stocked into EEPROM. Only by changing the value in RAM can set the address to 8007H. This address can only be used in writing RAM other than reading. If it is used to read, it is an invalid address. 10.4.1.2 The address instruction of other function in Modbus The master can operate on the parameters of the inverter as well as control the inverter, such as running or stopping and monitoring the working state of the inverter. Below is the parameter list of other functions 243 Goodrive300 inverters Function instruction Address definition Communication protocol Data meaning instruction R/W characteristics 0001H:forward running 0002H:reverse running 0003H:forward jogging Communication control command 0004H:reverse jogging 2000H 0005H:stop W 0006H:coast to stop (emergency stop) 0007H:fault reset 0008H:jogging stop 0009H:pre-exciting The address of the communication n setting value 2001H Communication setting frequency(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz)) 2002H PID given, range(0~1000, 1000 corresponds to100.0% ) 2003H PID feedback, range(0~1000, 1000 corresponds to100.0% ) W 2004H Torque setting value (-3000~3000, 1000 corresponds to the 100.0% of the rated current of the motor) W 2005H The upper limit frequency setting during forward rotation(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz)) W 2006H The upper limit frequency setting during reverse rotation(0~Fmax(unit: 0.01Hz)) W 2007H The upper limit torque of electromotion torque (0~3000, 1000 corresponds to the 100.0% of the rated current of the motor) W 2008H The upper limit torque of braking torque (0~3000, 1000 corresponds to the 100.0% of the rated current of the motor) W 2009H Special control command word Bit0~1:=00:motor 1 =01:motor 2 =10:motor 3 =11:motor 4 Bit2:=1 torque control =0:speed control W 200AH Virtual input terminal command , range: 0x000~0x1FF W 200BH Virtual input terminal command , range: 0x00~0x0F W 200CH Voltage setting value(special for V/F separation) (0~1000, 1000 corresponds to the 100.0% of the rated voltage of the motor) W 244 W Goodrive300 inverters Function instruction Communication protocol Address definition Data meaning instruction R/W characteristics 200DH AO output setting 1(-1000~1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%) W 200EH AO output setting 2(-1000~1000, 1000 corresponds to 100.0%) W 0001H:forward running SW 1 of the inverter 0002H:forward running 2100H R 0003H:stop 0004H:fault 0005H: POFF state SW 2 of the inverter 2101H Bit0: =0:ready for operation =1:not ready for operation Bi1~2:=00:motor 1 =01:motor 2 =10:motor 3 =11:motor 4 Bit3: =0:asynchronous motor =1:synchronous motor Bit4:=0:pre-alarm without overload =1:overload pre-alarm Bit5~ Bit6: =00: keypad control =01: terminal contorl =10: communication control Fault code of the inverter 2102H See the fault type instruction R Identifying code of the inverter 2103H Goodrive300-----0x0110 R Operation frequency 3000H 0~Fmax (unit: 0.01Hz) R Setting freqency 3001H 0~Fmax (unit: 0.01Hz) R Bus voltage 3002H 0.0~2000.0V (unit: 0.1V) R Output voltage 3003H 0~1200V (unit: 1V) R Output current 3004H 0.0~3000.0A (unit: 0.1A) R Rotation speed 3005H 0~65535 (unit: 1RPM) R Output power 3006H -300.0~300.0% (unit: 0.1%) R Output torque 3007H -250.0~250.0% (unit: 0.1%) R Close loop setting 3008H -100.0~100.0% (unit: 0.1%) R Close loop feedback 3009H -100.0~100.0% (unit: 0.1%) R R Input IO state 300AH 00~0F R Output IO state 300BH 00~0F R Analog input 1 300CH 0.00~10.00V (unit: 0.01V) 245 R Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol Function instruction Address definition R/W characteristics Analog input 2 300DH 0.00~10.00V (unit: 0.01V) R Analog input 3 300EH 0.00~10.00V (unit: 0.01V) R Analog input 4 300FH Read input of high-speed pulse 1 3010H Read input of high-speed pulse 2 3011H Read the current stage of multi-stage speed 3012H 0~15 R External length 3013H 0~65535 R External counting 3014H 0~65535 R -300.0~300.0% (unit: 0.1%) R Data meaning instruction R 0.00~50.00kHz (unit: 0.01Hz) R R Torque setting 3015H Identifying code of the inverter 3016H R Fault code 5000H R R/W characteristics means the function is with read and write characteristics. For example, “communication control command” is writing chrematistics and control the inverter with writing command (06H). R characteristic can only read other than write and W characteristic can only write other than read. Note: when operate on the inverter with the table above, it is necessary to enable some parameters. For example, the operation of running and stopping, it is necessary to set P00.01 to communication running command channel and set P00.02 to MODBUS communication channel. And when operate on “PID given”, it is necessary to set P09.00 to “MODBUS communication setting”. The encoding rules for device codes (corresponds to identifying code 2103H of the inverter) Code high 8bit 01 Meaning GD Code low 8 Meaning position 0x08 GD35 vector inverter 0x09 GD35-H1 vector inverter 0x0a GD300 vector inverter 0x0b GD100 simple vector inverter 0x0c GD200 universal inverter 246 Goodrive300 inverters Code high 8bit Meaning Communication protocol Code low 8 Meaning position 0x0d GD10 mini inverter 0x0e GD800 PWM rectifier 0x0f GD800 PWM inverter Note: the code is consisted of 16 bit which is high 8 bits and low 8 bits. High 8 bits mean the motor type series and low 8 bits mean the derived motor types of the series. For example, 0110H means Goodrive300 vector inverters. 10.4.5 Fieldbus ratio values The communication data is expressed by hex in actual application and there is no radix point in hex. For example, 50.12Hz can not be expressed by hex so 50.12 can be magnified by 100 times into 5012, so hex 1394H can be used to express 50.12. A non-integer can be timed by a multiple to get an integer and the integer can be called fieldbus ratio values. The fieldbus ratio values are refered to the radix point of the setting range or default value in the function parameter list. If there are figures behind the radix point (n=1), then the fieldbus n ratio value m is . Take the table as the example: 10 If there is one figure behind the radix point in the setting range or the default value, then the fieldbus ratio value is 10. if the data received by the upper monitor is 50, then the “hibernation restore delay time” is 5.0 (5.0=50÷10). If Modbus communication is used to control the hibernation restore delay time as 5.0s. Firstly, 5.0 can be magnified by 10 times to integer 50 (32H) and then this data can be sent. After the inverter receives the command, it will change 50 into 5 according to the fieldbus ratio value and then set the hibernation restore delay time as 5s. Another example, after the upper monitor sends the command of reading the parameter of 247 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol hibernation restore delay time ,if the response message of the inverter is as following: Because the parameter data is 0032H (50) and 50 divided by 10 is 5, then the hibernation restore delay time is 5s. 10.4.6 Fault message response There may be fault in the communication control. For example, some parameter can only be read. If a writing message is sent, the inverter will return a fault response message. The fault message is from the inverter to the master, its code and meaning is as below: Code Name Meaning The command from master can not be executed. The reason Illegal 01H command maybe: 1. This command is only for new version and this version can not realize. 2. Slave is in fault state and can not execute it. 02H Illegal data address. Some of the operation addresses are invalid or not allowed to access. Especially the combination of the register and the transmitting bytes are invalid. When there are invalid data in the message framed received by slave. 03H Illegal value Note: This error code does not indicate the data value to write exceed the range, but indicate the message frame is an illegal frame. 04H Operation failed 05H Password error 06H Data frame error The parameter setting in parameter writing is invalid. For example, the function input terminal can not be set repeatedly. The password written to the password check address is not same as the password set by P7.00. In the frame message sent by the upper monitor, the length of the digital frame is incorrect or the counting of CRC check bit in RTU is different from the lower monitor. 07H Written not allowed. It only happen in write command, the reason maybe: 1. The written data exceeds the parameter range. 248 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol 2. The parameter should not be modified now. 3. The terminal has already been used. The parameter can not be 08H changed The modified parameter in the writing of the upper monitor can not be modified during running. during running Password 09H protection When the upper monitor is writing or reading and the user password is set without password unlocking, it will report that the system is locked. The slave uses functional code fields and fault addresses to indicate it is a normal response or some error occurs (named as objection response). For normal responses, the slave shows corresponding function codes, digital address or sub-function codes as the response. For objection responses, the slave returns a code which equals the normal code, but the first byte is logic 1. For example: when the master sends a message to the slave, requiring it to read a group of address data of the inverter function codes, there will be following function codes: 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex 03H) For normal responses, the slave responds the same codes, while for objection responses, it will return: 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 (Hex 83H) Besides the function codes modification for the objection fault, the slave will respond a byte of abnormal code which defines the error reason. When the master receives the response for the objection, in a typical processing, it will send the message again or modify the corresponding order. For example, set the “running command channel” of the inverter (P00.01, parameter address is 0001H) with the address of 01H to 03, the command is as following: But the setting range of “running command channel” is 0~2, if it is set to 3, because the number is beyond the range, the inverter will return fault response message as below: 249 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol Abnormal response code 86H means the abnormal response to writing command 06H; the fault code is 04H. In the table above, its name is operation failed and its meaning is that the parameter setting in parameter writing is invalid. For example, the function input terminal can not be set repeatedly. 10.4.7 Example of writing and reading Refer to 10.4.1 and 10.4.2 for the command format. 10.4.7.1 Example of reading command 03H Read the state word 1 of the inverter with the address of 01H (refer to table 1). From the table 1, the parameter address of the state word 1 of the inverter is 2100H. The command sent to the inverter: If the response message is as below: The data content is 0003H. From the table 1, the inverter stops. Watch “the current fault type” to “the previous 5 times fault type” of the inverter through commands, the corresponding function code is P07.27~P07.32 and corresponding parameter address is 071BH~0720H(there are 6 from 071BH). The command sent to the inverter: If the response message is as below: 250 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol See from the returned data, all fault types are 0023H (decimal 35) with the meaning of maladjustment (STo). 10.4.7.2 Example of writing command 06H Make the inverter with the address of 03H to run forward. See table 1, the address of “communication control command” is 2000H and forward running is 0001. See the table below. The command sent by the master: If the operation is success, the response may be as below (the same with the command sent by the master): Set the Max. Output frequency of the inverter with the address of 03H as100Hz. See the figures behind the radix point, the fieldbus ratio value of the Max. output frequency (P00.03) is 100. 100Hz timed by 100 is 10000 and the corresponding hex is 2710H. The command sent by the master: 251 Goodrive300 inverters Communication protocol If the operation is successful, the response may be as below (the same with the command sent by the master): Note: the blank in the above command is for illustration. The blank can not be added in the actual application unless the upper monitor can remove the blank by themselves. Common communication fault Common communication faults are: no response to the communication or the inverter returns abnormal fault. The possible reason for no response to the communication: Selecting wrong serial interface, for example, if the converter is COM1, selecting COM2 during the communication The baud rate, digital bit, end bit and check bit are not the same with the inverter + and - of RS485 are connected in reverse. The 485 wire cap on the terminal board of the inverter is not plug in. the wire cap in behind the terminal arrangement. 252 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A Extension card Appendix A A.1 What this chapter contains This chapter describes the extension cards used in Goodrive300 series inverters. A.2 Profibus extension card (1) Profibus is an open international fieldbus standard that allows data exchange among various types of automation components. It is widely used in manufacturing automation, process automation and in other automation areas such as buildings, transportation, power, providing an effective solution for the realization of comprehensive automation and site-equipment intellectualization. (2) Profibus is composed of three compatible components, Profibus-DP (Decentralized Periphery, distributed peripherals), Profibus-PA (Process Automation), Profibus-FMS (Fieldbus Message Specification). It is periodically exchange data with the inverter when using master-slave way. PRNV Profibus-DP Adapter module only supports Profibus-DP protocol. (3) The physical transmission medium of bus is twisted-pair (in line with RS-485 standard), two-wire cable or fiber optic cable. Baud rate is from 9.6Kbit/s to 12Mbit/s. The maximum bus cable length is between 100 m and 1200 m, specific length depending on the selected transmission rate (see chapter Technical Data). Up to 31 nodes can be connected to the same Profibus network when repeaters aren’t used. But, if use repeaters, up to 127 nodes can be connected to the same Profibus network segment (including repeaters and master stations). (4) In the process of Profibus communication, tokens are assigned among main stations and master-slave transmission among master-slave stations. Supporting single-master or multi-master system, stations-programmable logic controller (PLC)-choose nodes to respond to the host instruction. Cycle master-from user data transmission and non-cyclic master-master station can also send commands to multiple nodes in the form of broadcast. In this case, the nodes do not need to send feedback signals to the host. In the Profibus network, communication between nodes can not be allowed. (5) Profibus protocol is described in detail in EN 50170 standard. To obtain more information about Profibus, please refer to the above-mentioned EN 50170 standards. 253 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A 254 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A A.2.1 Product naming rules Fieldbus adapter naming rules, the product model: EC-TX 1 03 ① ② ③ ④ No. Instruction ① Product type ② Card type TX: communciation card ③ Technical Odds such as 1,3,5,7 means the 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th technical version ④ Card difference Meaning EC: extension card 03: PROFIBUS+Ethernet communication card 04: Ethernet+CAN communication card A.2.2 EC-TX-103 communication card EC-TX-103 communication card is an optional device to inverter which makes inverter connected to Profibus network. In Profibus network, inverter is a subsidiary device. The following functions can be completed using EC-TX-103 communication card: ● Send control commands to inverter (start, stop, fault reset, etc.). ● Send speed or given torque signal to inverter. ● Read state and actual values from inverter. ● Modify inverter parameter. Please refer to the description of function codes in Group P15 for the commands supported by the inverter. Below is the structure diagram of the connection between the INVT inverter and Profibus: A.2.3 The appearance of EC-TX-103 communication card 1 2 3 4 5 Outline diagram of EC-TX-103 communication card 1. Interface to the panel 2. Bus connector 3. Rotation node address selection switches 4. 255 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A State display LEDs External dimensions of EC-TX-103 communication card (Unit: mm) A.2.4 Compatible motor of EC-TX-103 communication card EC-TX-103 communication card is compatible with the following products: ● Goodrive300 series devices and all blasters supporting Profibus extension ● Host station supporting Profibus-DP protocol A.2.5 Delivery list The package of EC-TX-103 communication card contains: ● EC-TX-103 communication card ● Three copper columns (M3x10) ● User’s manual Please contact with SHENZHEN INVT ELECTRIC CO., LTD or suppliers if there is something missing. Notice will not be given for the reason of product upgrades. A.2.6 Installation of EC-TX-103 communication card A.2.6.1 Mechanical installation of EC-TX-103 communication card 1. Installation ambient ● Ambient temperature:0℃ ~ +40℃ ● Relative humidity:5%~95% ● Other climate conditions: no drew, ice, rain, snow, hail air condition and the solar radiation is below 700W/m 2,air pressure 70~106kPa ● Content of salt spray and corrosive gases :Pollution Level 2 ● Dust and solid particles content: Pollution Level 2 ● Vibration and shock: 5.9m/s2 (0.6g) on 9~ 200Hz sinusoidal vibration 256 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A 2. Installation steps: ● Fix the three copper columns on the location holes with screws. ● Insert the module into the defined location carefully and fix it on the copper column with screw. ● Set the bus terminal switch of the module to the needed location. 3. Notes: Disconnect the device from the power line before installation. Wait for at least three minutes to let the capacitors discharge. Cut off dangerous voltage from external control circuit to the unit output and input terminals. Some electric components are sensitive to static charge. Do not touch the circuit board. If you have to operate on it, please wear the grounding wrist belt. A.2.6.2 Electrical installation of EC-TX-103 communication card 1. Node selection Node address is the only address of Profibus on the bus. The address which is among 00~99 is shown with two figures and is selected by the spinning switch on the module. The left switch shows the first number and the right one show the second number. Node address = 10 x the first digital value + the second digital value x 1 2. Bus terminals There is a bus terminal in each heading and ending to avoid error during operation. The DIP switch on RPBA-01PCB is used to connect the bus terminals which can avoid the signal feedback from the bus cables. If the module is the first or last one in the internet, the bus terminal should be set as ON. Please disconnect EC-TX-103 communication card terminals when the Profibus D-sub connector with internal terminals is in use. A.2.6.3 Bus net connection of EC-TX-103 communication card Bus communication interface Transformation by double-shielded twisted pair copper cable is the most common way in Profibus (conform to RS-485standard). The basic characteristics of transformation technology: 257 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A ● Net topology:Linear bus, there are bus resistor in two ends. ● Transforming speed: 9.6k bit/s~12M bit/s ● Medium: double-shielded twisted pair cables,the shield can be removed according to the environment (EMC). ● Station number: There are 32 stations in each segment (without relays) as to 127 stations (with relays) ● Contact pin: 9 frames D pin, the connector contact pins are as below:, Contact pin of the connector Instruction 1 - Unused 2 - Unused 3 B-Line 4 RTS 5 GND_BUS 6 +5V BUS 7 - 8 A-Line 9 - Housing SHLD Positive data(twisted pair cables 1) Sending requirement Isolation ground Isolated 5V DC power supply Unused Negative data(twisted pair cables 2) Unused Profibus shielded cable +5V and GND_BUS are used in the fieldbus terminals. Some devices, such as light transceiver (RS485) may get external power supply form these pins. RTS is used in some devices to determine the sending direction. Only A-Line wires, B-Line wires and shield are used in the normal application. It is recommended to apply the standard DB9 connector of SIEMENS. If the communication baud rate is above 187.5kbps, please follow the connection rules of SIEMENS seriously. 258 Goodrive300 inverters Available Appendix A Not available (with interference to the keypad wiring) Repeater Up to 32 stations can be connected to each segment (master station or subsidiary stations), the repeater have to be used when stations is more than 32. The repeaters in series are generally no more than 3. Note: There is no repeater station address. A.2.6.4 Transmission rate and maximum distance Maximum length of cable depends on the transmission rate. The Table below shows the relationship between transmission rate and distance. Transmission rate (kbps) A-wire (m) B-wire (m) 9.6 1200 1200 19.2 1200 1200 93.75 1200 1200 187.5 1000 600 500 400 200 1500 200 ----- 259 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A Transmission rate (kbps) A-wire (m) B-wire (m) 12000 100 ----- Transmission rate (kbps) A-wire (m) B-wire (m) Impedance (Ω) 135~165 100~130 Capacitance per unit length(pF/m) < 30 < 60 Loop Resistance (Ω/km) 110 -------- 0.64 > 0.53 > 0.34 > 0.22 Transmission line parameters: Core wire diameter (mm) 2 Line-core cross-section (mm ) Besides shielding twisted-pair copper wires, Profibus can also use optical fiber for transmission in an electromagnetic interference environment to increase the high-speed transmission distance there are two kinds of fiber optical conductors, one is low-cost plastic fiber conductor, used distance is less than 50 meters, the other is glass fiber conductor, and used distance is less than 1 kM. A.2.6.5 Profibus bus connection diagram Above is "terminal" wiring diagram. Cable is a standard Profibus cable consisting of a twisted pair and shielding layer. The shielded layer of Profibus cable on all nodes is directly grounded. Users can choose the best grounding method according to the situation. Note: Make sure that signal lines do not twist when connecting all stations. Shielded cable should be used when system runs under high electromagnetic interface environment, which can improve electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). If using shielded braided wire and shielding foil, both ends should be connected to ground. Using shielding area should be large enough to maintain a good conductivity. And data lines must be separated from high-voltage. Stub line segment should not be used when transmission rate more than 500K bit/s, The 260 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A plug is available on the market which connects directly to data input and output cable. Bus plug connection can be on or off at any time without interruption of data communications of other station. A.2.7 System configuration 1. Master station and inverter should be configured so that the master station can communicate with the module after correctly installing EC-TX-103 communication card. Each Profibus subsidiary station on the Profibus bus need to have "device description document" named GSD file which used to describe the characteristics of Profibus-DP devices. The software we provided for the user includes inverter related GSD files (device data files) information, users can obtain type definition file (GSD) of master machines from local INVT agent. Configuration parameters of EC-TX-103 communication card: Parameter number Parameter name Optional setting Factory setting 0 Module type Read only Profibus-DP 1 Node address 0~99 2 0:9.6 1:19.2 kbit/s 2:45.45 3:93.75 4:187.5 2 Baud rate setting 5:500 6 6:1.5 7:3 Mbit/s 8:6 9:9 10:12 3 PZD3 0~65535 0 4 PZD4 Ibid 0 … …… Ibid 0 10 PZD12 Ibid 0 2. Module type This parameter shows communication module type detected by inverter; users can not adjust this parameter. If this parameter is not defined, communication between the modules 261 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A and inverter can not be established. 3. Node address In Profibus network, each device corresponds to a unique node address, you can use the node address selection switch to define node address (switch isn’t at 0) and the parameter is only used to display the node address. If node address selection switch is 0, this parameter can define node address. The user can not adjust the parameter by themselves and the parameter is only used to display the node address. 4. GSD file In Profibus network, each Profibus subsidiary station needs GSD file "device description document" which used to describe the characteristics of Profibus-DP devices. GSD file contains all defined parameters, including baud rate, information length, amount of input/output data, meaning of diagnostic data. A CD-ROM will be offered in which contains GSD file (extension name is .gsd) for fieldbus adapter. Users can copy GSD file to relevant subdirectory of configuration tools, please refer to relevant system configuration software instructions to know specific operations and Profibus system configuration. A.2.8 Profibus-DP communication 1. Profibus-DP Profibus-DP is a distributed I/O system, which enables master machine to use a large number of peripheral modules and field devices. Data transmission shows cycle: master machine read input information from subsidiary machine then give feedback signal. EC-TX-103 communication card supports Profibus-DP protocol. 2. Service access point Profibus-DP has access to Profibus data link layer (Layer 2) services through service access point SAP. Every independent SAP has clearly defined function. Please refer to relevant Profibus user manual to know more about service access point information. PROFIDRIVE-Variable speed drive adopts Profibus model or EN50170 standards (Profibus protocol). 3. Profibus-DP information frame data structures Profibus-DP bus mode allows rapid data exchange between master station and inverter. Adopting master-slave mode dealing with inverter access, inverter is always subsidiary station, and each has definite address. Profibus periodic transmission messages use 16 words (16 bit) transmission, the structure shown in figure1. 262 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A Parameters area: PKW1-Parameter identification PKW2-array index number PKW3-parameter value 1 PKW4-parameter value 2 Process data: CW-Control word (from master to slave, see Table 1) SW-state word (from slave to master, see Table 3) PZD-process data (decided by users) (From master to slave output 【given value】, from slave to master input【actual value】) PZD area (process data area) PZD area of communication message is designed for control and monitor inverter. PZD from master and slave station is addressed in high priority; the priority of dealing with PZD is superior to that of PKW, and always sends current valid date from interface. Control word (CW) and state word (SW) Control word (CW) is a basic method of fieldbus system controlling inverter. It is sent by the fieldbus master station to inverter and the EC-TX-103 communication cards act as gateway. Inverter responds according to the control word and gives feedbacks to master machine through state word (SW). Contents of control word and state word are shown in table 4.6 and table 4.7 respectively. Please refer to inverter manual to know bit code. Given value Inverter can receive control information by several ways, these channels include: analog and digital input terminals, inverter control board and module communication (such as RS485, EC-TX-103 communication cards). In order to use Profibus control inverter, the communication module must be set to be inverter controller. Contents of set value are shown in Table 4.6. Actual value Actual value is a 16-bit word, which contains converter operation information. Monitoring 263 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A capabilities are defined by inverter parameter. The integer scaling of actual value is sent to master machine depending on selected function, please refer to inverter manual. Contents of actual values are shown in Table 5.4. Note: inverter always check the control word (CW) and bytes of given value. Mission message (From master station to inverter) Control word (CW) The first word of PZD is control word (CW) of inverter; due to different control word (CW) of PWM rectifier regenerative part and inverter part Illustration is depart in next two tables. Control word (CW) of Goodrive300 Bit 0~7 8 9~10 11 14 Name Value State/Description 1 Forward running 2 Reverse running 3 Forward jogging 4 Reverse jogging 5 Decelerate to stop 6 Coast to stop (Emergency stop) 7 Fault reset 8 Jogging stop 9 Premagnetizing 1 Write enable (mainly is PKW1-PKW4 ) 00 MOTOR GROUP 1 SELECTION MOTOR GROUP 01 MOTOR GROUP 2 SELECTION SELECTION 02 MOTOR GROUP 3 SELECTION 03 MOTOR GROUP 4 SELECTION TORQUE CONTROL 1 Torque control enable SELECTION 0 Torque control prohibition COMMAND BYTE WIRTE ENABLE RESERVED 1 0 15 HEARTBEAT REF 1 Heartbeat enable 0 Heartbeat prohibition Reference value (REF): 264 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A From 2nd word to 12th of PZD task message is the main set value REF, main frequency set value is offered by main setting signal source. As PWM rectifier feedback part doesn’t have main frequency setting part, corresponding settings belong to reserved part, the following table shows inverter part settings for Goodrive300. Bit PZD2 receiving Name 2:Given receiving 100.0%) receiving PZD5 receiving PZD6 receiving PZD7 receiving PZD8 0 1:Set frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz)) PZD3 PZD4 Function selection 0:Invalid PID, range(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 0 3:PID feedback, range(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 0 100.0%) 4:Torque set value(-3000~3000,1000 corresponds to 0 100.0% the rated current of the motor) 5:Set value of the forward rotation upper-limit 0 frequency(0~Fmax unit:0.01Hz)) 6:Set value of the reversed rotation upper-limit 0 frequency(0~Fmax(unit:0.01Hz)) 7:Electromotion torque upper limit (0~3000,1000 receiving corresponds to 100.0%of the rated current of the motor) PZD9 8:Braking torque upper limit (0~2000,1000 corresponds receiving PZD10 receiving PZD11 receiving 0 0 to 100.0% of the rated current of the motor) 9:Virtual input terminals command 0 Range:0x000~0x1FF 10:Virtual output terminals command 0 Range:0x00~0x0F 11:Voltage setting value(specialized for V/F separation )(0~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0% the rated voltage of the motor) PZD12 receiving 12:AO output set value 1(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds 0 to 100.0%) 13:AO output set value 1(-1000~1000,1000 corresponds to 100.0%) State word (SW): The first word of PZD response message is state word (SW) of inverter, the definition of state 265 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A word is as follows: State Word (SW) of Goodrive300 (SW) Bit Name 0~7 8 RUN STATE BYTE DC VOLTAGE ESTABLISH 9~10 11 Value Forward running 2 Reverse running 3 The inverter stops 4 The inverter is in fault 5 The inverter is in POFF state 1 Running ready 0 The running preparation is not ready 0 Motor 1 feedback MOTOR GROUP 1 Motor 2 feedback FEEDBACK 2 Motor 3 feedback 3 Motor 4 no feedback 1 Synchronous motor 0 Asynchronous motor 1 Overload pre-alarm 0 Non-overload pre-alarm 0 Keypad control 1 Terminal control 2 Communication control 3 Reserved 1 Heartbeat feedback 0 No heartbeat feedback MOTOR TYPE FEEDBACK 12 State/Description 1 OVERLOAD ALARM 13 RUN/STOP MODE 14 15 HEARTBEAT FEEDBACK Actual value (ACT): From 2nd word to 12th of PZD task message is main set value ACT, main frequency set value is offered by main setting signal source. Actual value of Goodrive300 Bit Name Function selection PZD2 0: Invalid sending 1:Running frequency(*100, Hz) PZD3 2: Set frequency(*100, Hz) sending 3: Bus voltage(*10, V) 0 0 266 Goodrive300 inverters Bit Appendix A Name Function selection PZD4 4: Output voltage(*1, V) sending 5:Output current (*10, A) PZD5 6:Output torque actual value(*10, %) sending 7:Output power actual value (*10, PZD6 %) sending 8:Running rotating speed(*1, RPM) PZD7 9:Running linear speed (*1, m/s) sending 10:Ramp given frequency PZD8 11:Fault code sending 12:AI1 value (*100, V) PZD9 13:AI2 value (*100, V) sending 14:AI3 value (*100, V) PZD10 15:PULSE frequency value (*100, sending kHz) PZD11 16:Terminals input state sending 17:Terminals output state 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 18:PID given (*100, %) PZD12 sending 19:PID feedback (*100, %) 0 20:Motor rated torque PKW area (parameter identification marks PKW1-value area). PKW area describes treatment of parameter identification interface, PKW interface is a mechanism which determine parameters transmission between two communication partners, such as reading and writing parameter values. Structure of PKW area: Parameter identification zone In the process of periodic Profibus-DP communication, PKW area is composed of four words (16 bit), each word is defined as follows: The first word PKW1 (16 bit) 267 Goodrive300 inverters Bit 15~00 Appendix A Task or response identification marks 0~7 The second word PKW2 (16 bit) Bit 15~00 Basic parameters address 0~247 The third word PKW3 (16 bit) Parameter value (high word) or return error Bit 15~00 00 code value The fourth word PKW4 (16 bit) Bit 15~00 Parameter value (low word) 0~65535 Note: If the master requests one parameter value, the value of PKW3 and PKW4 will not be valid. Task requests and responses When passing data to slave machine, master machine use request label while slave machine use response label to positive or negative confirmation. Table 5.5 and Table 5.6 list the request/response functional. The definition of task logo PKW1 is as follows: Definition of task logo PKW1 Request label (From master to slave) Response label Positive Negative Request Function confirmation confirmation 0 No task 0 - 1 Request parameter value 1,2 3 1 3 or 4 2 3 or 4 1 3 or 4 2 3 or 4 2 Modification parameter value (one word) [only change RAM] 3 4 5 Modification parameter value (double word) [only change RAM] Modification parameter value (one word) [RAM and EEPROM are modified] Modification parameter value (double word) [RAM and EEPROM are modified] Request label "2"-modification parameter value (one word) [only change RAM], "3"-modification parameter value (double word) [only change RAM] "5"-modification parameter value (double word) [RAM and EPROM are modified] not 268 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A support. Reponses logo PKW1 defines as below: Response label (From slave to master) Confirmation Function 0 No response 1 Transmission parameter value ( one word) 2 Transmission parameter value ( two word) Task can not be executed and returns the following error number: 0: Illegal parameter number 1: Parameter values can not be changed (read-only parameter) 2: Out of set value range 3: The sub-index number is not correct 4: Setting is not allowed (only reset) 5: Data type is invalid 3 6: The task could not be implemented due to operational state 7: Request isn’t supported. 8: Request can’t be completed due to communication error 9: Fault occurs when write operation to stationary store 10: Request fails due to timeout 11: Parameter can not be assigned to PZD 12: Control word bit can’t be allocated 13: Other errors 4 No parameter change rights Example 1: Read parameter value Read keypad set frequency value (the address of keypad set frequency is 4) which can be achieved by setting PKW1 as 1, PKW2 as 4, return value is in PKW4. Request (From master to inverter): PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 ··· PZD12 Requst 00 01 00 04 00 00 00 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx ··· xx xx 0004: Parameter address 0001 Request read parameter Response (From inverter to master) 269 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix A PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 ··· PZD12 Response 00 01 00 04 00 00 50 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx ··· xx xx 5000: Address 4 parameter 0001: Reponse (Parameter values refreshed) Example 2: Modify the parameter values (RAM and EEPROM are modified) Modify keypad settings frequency value (the address of keypad set frequency is 4) which can be achieved by setting PKW1 as 2; PKW2 as 4, modification value (50.00) is in PKW4. Request (From master to inverter): PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 ··· PZD12 Requst 00 02 00 04 00 00 50 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx ··· xx xx 5000: Address 4 parameter 0004: Parameter changes Response (From inverter to master) PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 CW PZD2 PZD3 ··· PZD12 Response 00 01 00 04 00 00 50 00 xx xx xx xx xx xx ··· xx xx 0001: Response (Parameter values refreshed) Example for PZD: Transmission of PZD area is achieved through inverter function code; please refer to relevant INVT inverter user manual to know relevant function code. Example 1: Read process data of inverter Inverter parameter selects "8: Run frequency" as PZD3 to transmit which can be achieved by setting Pd.14 as 8. This operation is mandatory until the parameter is instead of others. Request (From master to inverter): PKW1 Response xx PKW2 xx xx xx PKW3 PKW4 xx xx xx xx CW xx xx PZD2 xx xx PZD3 00 0A … PZD12 … xx xx Example 2: Write process data into inverter Inverter parameter selects "2”: Traction given" from PZD3 which can be achieved by setting Pd.03 as 2. In each request frame, parameters will use PZD3 to update until re-select a parameter. Request (From master to converter): PKW1 PKW2 PKW3 PKW4 270 CW PZD2 PZD3 … PZD12 Goodrive300 inverters Response xx Appendix A xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx xx 00 00 … xx xx In each request frame contents of PZD3 are given by traction until re-select a parameter. A.2.9 Fault information EC-TX-103 communication card is equipped with 2 fault display LEDs as shown is figure below. The roles of these LEDs are as follows: Fault display LEDs LED No. 1 Name Main display Color Green Red 2 Online Green 3 Offline Red Function ON--Connection works ON-Connection lost for ever Flashes- Connection lost for temporary ON-module online and data can be exchanged. OFF-module is not in "online" state. ON-module offline and data can’t be exchanged. OFF-module is not in "offline" state. 1. Flicker frequency 1Hz-configuration error: The length of user parameter data sets is different from that of network configuration process during module initialization process. 2. Flicker frequency 2Hz-user parameter data error: The 4 Fault Red length or content of user parameter data sets is different from that of network configuration process during module initialization process. 3. Flicker frequency 4Hz-Profibus communication ASIC initialization error. 4. OFF-Diagnostic closed. 271 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B Technical data Appendix B B.1 What this chapter contains This chapter contains the technical specifications of the inverter, as well as provisions for fulfilling the requirements for CE and other marks. B.2 Ratings B.2.1 Capacity Inverter sizing is based on the rated motor current and power. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the inverter must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current. Also the rated power of the inverter must be higher than or equal to the rated motor power. The power ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage range. Note: 1. The maximum allowed motor shaft power is limited to 1.5 · PN. If the limit is exceeded, motor torque and current are automatically restricted. The function protects the input bridge of the drive against overload. 2. The ratings apply at ambient temperature of 40 °C 3. It is important to check that in Common DC systems the power flowing through the common DC connection does not exceed PN. B.2.2 Derating The load capacity decreases if the installation site ambient temperature exceeds 40 °C, the altitude exceeds 1000 metersor the switching frequency is changed from 4 kHz to 8, 12 or 15 kHz. B.2.2.1 Temperature derating In the temperature range +40 °C…+50 °C, the rated output current is decreased by 3% for every additional 1 °C. Refer to the below list for the actual derating. 272 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B B.2.2.2 Altitude derating The device can output rated power if the installation site below 1000m. The output power decreases if the altitude exceeds 1000 meters. Below is the detailed decreasing range of the derating: For 3-phase 200 V drives, the maximum altitude is 3000 m above sea level. In altitudes 2000…3000 m, the derating is 2% for every 100 m. B.2.2.3 Carrier frequency derating For Goodrive300 series inverters, different power level corresponds to different carrier frequency range. The rated power of the inverter is based on the factory carrier frequency, so if it is above the factory value, the inverter needs to derate 20% for every additional 1 kHz carrier frequency. B.3 Electric power network specification AC 3PH 400V±15% Voltage AC 3PH 220V±10% AC 3PH 660V±10% Short-circuit Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current at the input 273 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B power connection as defined in IEC 60439-1 is 100 kA. The drive is capacity suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100 kA at the drive maximum rated voltage. Frequency 50/60 Hz ± 5%, maximum rate of change 20%/s B.4 Motor connection data Motor type Voltage Asynchronous induction motor or synchronous permanent magnet motor 0 to U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point Short-circuit protection Frequency Frequency The motor output is short-circuit proof by IEC 61800-5-1 0...400 Hz 0.01 Hz resolution Current Refer to Ratings Power limit Field weakening point Carrier frequency 1.5 · PN 10...400 Hz 4, 8, 12 or 15 kHz(in scalar control) B.4.1 EMC compatibility and motor cable length To comply with the European EMC Directive (standard IEC/EN 61800-3), use the following maximum motor cable lengths for 4 kHz switching frequency. All frame sizes Maximum motor cable length, 4 kHz With internal EMC filter Second environment (category C3) 30 first environment (category C2) 30 Maximum motor cable length is determined by the drive’s operational factors. Contact your local INVT representative for the exact maximum lengths when using external EMC filters. B.5 Applicable standards The inverter complies with the following standards: EN ISO 13849-1: 2008 IEC/EN 60204-1:2006 Safety of machinery-safety related parts of control systems Part 1: general principles for design Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 274 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B 1: General requirements. Safety of machinery – Functional safety of safety-related IEC/EN 62061: 2005 electrical,electronic and programmable electronic control systems IEC/EN 61800-3:2004 IEC/EN 61800-5-1:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems. Part 3: EMC requirements and specific test methods Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-1: Safety requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy IEC/EN 61800-5-2:2007 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems – Part 5-2: Safety requirements. Functional. B.5.1 CE marking The CE mark is attached to the drive to verify that the drive follows the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives. B.5.2 Compliance with the European EMC Directive The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical equipment used within the European Union. The EMC product standard (EN 61800-3:2004) covers requirements stated for drives. See section EMC regulations B.6 EMC regulations EMC product standard (EN 61800-3:2004) contains the EMC requirements to the inverter. First environment: domestic environment (includes establishments connected to a low-voltage network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes). Second environment includes establishments connected to a network not directly supplying domestic premises. Four categories of the inverter: Inverter of category C1: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V and used in the first environment. Inverter of category C2: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V other than pins, sockets and motion devices and intended to be installed and commissioned only by a professional electrican when used in the first environment. Note: IEC/EN 61800-3 in EMC standard doesn’t limit the power distribution of the inverter, but it defines the ustage, installation and commission. The professional electrician has necessary skills in installing and/or commissioning power drive systems, including their EMC aspects. 275 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix B Inverter of category C3: inverter of rated voltage less than 1000 V and used in the second environment other than the first one Inverter of category C4: inverter of rated voltage more than 1000 V or the nomninal current is above or equal to 400A and used in the complicated system in second environment B.6.1 Category C2 The emission limits are complied with the following provisions: 1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the options and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual. 2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual. 3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual. 4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see EMC compatibility and motor cable length In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio inference, in which case supplementary mitigation measures may be required. B.6.2 Category C3 The immunity performance of the drive complies with the demands of IEC/EN 61800-3, second environment. The emission limits are complied with the following provisions: 1. The optional EMC filter is selected according to the options and installed as specified in the EMC filter manual. 2. The motor and control cables are selected as specified in this manual. 3. The drive is installed according to the instructions given in this manual. 4. For the maximum motor cable length with 4 kHz switching frequency, see EMC compatibility and motor cable length A drive of category C3 is not intended to be used on a low-voltage public network which supplies domestic premises. Radio frequency interference is expected if the drive is used on such a network. 276 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C Dimension drawings Appendix C C.1 What this chapter contains Dimension drawings of the Goodrive300 are shown below. The dimensions are given in millimeters andinches. C.2 Keypad structure C.2.1 Structure chart C.2.2 Installaiton chart 277 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C C.3 Inverter chart C.4 Inverter chart C.4.1 Wall installation Wall installation of 1.5-30kW inverters 278 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C Wall installation of 37-110kW inverters Wall installation of 132-200kW inverters Wall installation of 220-315kW inverters Installation dimension (unit:mm) Installation Inverter model W1 W2 H1 H2 D1 1.5kW~2.2kW 126 115 193 175 174.5 5 hole 4kW~5.5kW 146 131 263 243.5 181 6 7.5kW~11kW 170 151 331.5 303.5 216 6 15kW~18.5kW 230 210 342 311 216 6 22kW~30kW 255 237 407 384 245 7 37kW~55kW 270 130 555 540 325 7 75kW~110kW 325 200 680 661 365 9.5 132kW~200kW 500 180 870 850 360 11 220kW~315kW 680 230 960 926 379.5 13 279 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C C.4.2 Flange installation Flange installation of 1.5-30kW inverters Flange installation of 37-110kW inverters Flange installation of 132-200kW inverters Installation dimension (unit:mm) 280 Goodrive300 inverters Inverter model W1 W2 Appendix C W3 W4 H1 H2 H3 H4 D1 D2 Installation hole 1.5kW~2.2kW 150 115 130 7.5 234 220 190 16.5 174.5 65.5 5 4kW~5.5kW 170 131 150 9.5 292 276 260 10 181 79.5 6 7.5kW~11kW 191 151 174 11.5 370 351 324 15 216.2 113 6 15kW~18.5kW 250 210 234 12 375 356 334 10 216 108 6 22kW~30kW 275 237 259 11 445 426 404 10 245 119 7 37kW~55kW 270 130 261 65.5 555 540 516 17 325 167 7 75kW~110kW 325 200 317 58.5 680 661 626 23 363 182 9.5 132kW~200kW 500 180 480 60 870 850 796 37 358 178.5 11 C.4.3 Floor installtion Floor installation of 220-315kW inverters 281 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix C Floor installation of 350-500kW inverters Installation Inverter model W1 W2 W3 W4 H1 H2 D1 D2 220kW~315kW 750 230 714 680 1410 1390 380 150 13\12 350kW~500kW 620 230 573 \ 1700 1678 560 240 22\12 hole 282 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Peripherial options and parts D.1 What this chapter contains Appendix D What this chapter contain This chapter describes how to select the options and parts of Goodrive300 series. D.2 Peripherial wiring Below is the peripherial wiring of Goodrive300 series inverters. Note: 1. The inverter below 30kW (including 30kW) are embedded with braking unit. 2. Only the inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) have P1 terminal and are connected with DC reators. 3. The braking units apply standard braking unit DBU series in. Refer to the instruction of DBU for detailed information. Pictures Name Descriptions Cables Device to transfer the electronic signals 283 Goodrive300 inverters Pictures Appendix D Name Descriptions Cables Device to transfer the electronic signals Prevent from electric shock and protect the power supply and the cables system from overcurrent when short circuits occur. Breaker (Please select the breaker with the function of reducing high order harmonic and the rated sensitive current to 1 inverter should be above 30mA). This device is used to improve the power Input reactor factor of the input side of the inverter and control the higher harmonic current. The inverter above 37kW (including 37kW) DC reactor can be connected with DC reactor. Control the electromagnetic interference generated from the inverter, please install Input filter close to the input terminal side of the inverter. Shorten the DEC time The inverters below 30kW(including 30kW) Braking unit or resistors only need braking resistors and the inverters above 37kW(including 37 kW) or need braking units Control the interference from the output Output filter side of the inverter and please install close to the output terminals of the inverter. Prolong the effective transimiting distance of the inverter to control the sudden high Output reactor voltage when switchiong on/off the IGBT of the inverter. D.3 Power supply Please refer to Electronical Installation. 284 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Check that the voltage degree of the inverter complies with the voltage of the supply power voltage. D.4 Cables D.4.1 Power cables Dimension the input power and motor cables according to local regulations. • The input power and the motor cables must be able to carry the corresponding load currents. • The cable must be rated for at least 70 °C maximum permissible temperature of the conductor in continuous use. • The conductivity of the PE conductor must be equal to that of the phase conductor (same cross-sectional area). • Refer to chapter Technical Data for the EMC requirements. A symmetrical shielded motor cable (see the figure below) must be used to meet the EMC requirements of the CE. A four-conductor system is allowed for input cabling, but a shielded symmetrical cable is recommended. Compared to a four-conductor system, the use of a symmetrical shielded cable reduces electromagnetic emission of the whole drive system as well as motor bearing currents and wear. Note: A separate PE conductor is required if the conductivity of the cable shield is not sufficient for the purpose. To function as a protective conductor, the shield must have the same cross-sectional area as the phase conductors when they are made of the same metal. To effectively suppress radiated and conducted radio-frequency emissions, the shield conductivity must be at least 1/10 of the phase conductor conductivity. The requirements are easily met with a copper or aluminum shield. The minimum requirement of the motor cable shield of the drive is shown below. It consists of a concentric layer of copper wires. The better and tighter the shield, the lower the emission level and bearing currents. 285 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D D.4.2 Control cables All analog control cables and the cable used for the frequency input must be shielded. Use a double-shielded twisted pair cable (Figure a) for analog signals. Employ one individually shielded pair for each signal. Do not use common return for different analog signals. A double-shielded cable is the best alternative for low-voltage digital signals, but a single-shielded or unshielded twisted multipair cable (Figure b) is also usable. However, for frequency input, always use a shielded cable. Note: Run analog and digital signals in separate cables. The relay cable needs the cable type with braided metallic screen. The keypad needs to connect with cables. It is recommended to use the screen cable on complex electrical magnetic condition. Note: Run analog and digital signals in separate cables. Do not make any voltage tolerance or insulation resistance tests (for example hi-pot or megger) on any part of the drive as testing can damage the drive. Every drive has been tested for insulation between the main circuit and the chassis at the factory. Also, there are voltage-limiting circuits inside the drive which cut down the testing voltage automatically. Check the insulation of the input power cable according to local regulations before connecting to the drive. Recommended cable size (mm2) Connecting cable size (mm2) The inverter RST UVW PE RST P1 UVW and(+) screw torque PE size (Nm) PB (+) and Terminal Tightening (-) GD300-1R5G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-2R2G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-004G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 286 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Recommended cable size (mm2) Connecting cable size (mm2) The inverter RST UVW PE RST P1 UVW and(+) screw torque PE size (Nm) PB (+) and Terminal Tightening (-) GD300-1R5G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-2R2G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-004G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-5R5G-4 2.5 2.5 2.5~16 4~16 4~6 2.5~6 M4 1.2~1.5 GD300-7R5G-4 4 4 2.5~16 4~16 4~6 2.5~6 M5 2-~2.5 GD300-011G-4 6 6 6~16 6~16 6~10 6~10 M5 2-~2.5 GD300-015G-4 10 10 10~16 6~16 6~10 6~16 M5 2-~2.5 GD300-018G-4 16 16 16~25 16~25 6~10 10~16 M5 2-~2.5 GD300-022G-4 16 16 10~16 16~35 10~16 10~16 M6 4~6 GD300-030G-4 25 16 16~25 16~35 16~25 16~25 M6 4~6 GD300-037G-4 25 16 25~50 25~50 16~50 16~25 M8 9~11 GD300-045G-4 35 16 25~50 25~50 25~50 16~25 M8 9~11 GD300-055G-4 50 25 35~95 50~95 25~95 25 M8 9~11 GD300-075G-4 70 35 70~95 35~95 50~75 25~35 M10 18~23 GD300-090G-4 95 50 35~95 35~150 25~70 50~150 M10 18~23 M10 18~23 GD300-110G-4 120 70 95~300 70~300 35~300 70~240 GD300-220G-4 185 95 95~300 70~300 35~300 95~240 GD300-250G-4 240 120 95~300 95~300 70~300 120~240 It is recommended to GD300-280G-4 95*2P 95 95~150 70~150 70~150 35~95 use GD300-315G-4 150*2P 150 95~150 70~150 70~150 50~150 sleeve GD300-350G-4 95*4P 95*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 60~150 screw is used as GD300-400G-4 95*4P 95*2P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150 terminal. GD300-500G-4 95*4P 95*4P 95~150 70~150 70~150 70~150 wrench or because Note: 1. It is appropriate to use the recommended cable size under 40℃ and rated current. The wiring distance should be no more than 100m.. 2. Terminals P1, (+), PB and (-) connects the DC reactor options and parts. 287 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D D.4.3 Routing the cables Route the motor cable away from other cable routes. Motor cables of several drives can be run in parallel installed next to each other. It is recommended that the motor cable, input power cable and control cables are installed on separate trays. Avoid long parallel runs of motor cables with other cables to decrease electromagnetic interference caused by the rapid changes in the drive output voltage. Where control cables must cross power cables make sure that they are arranged at an angle as near to 90 degrees as possible. The cable trays must have good electrical bonding to each other and to the grounding electrodes. Aluminum tray systems can be used to improve local equalizing of potential. A figure of the cable routing is shown below. D.4.4 Checking the insulation Check the insulation of the motor and motor cable as follows: 1. Check that the motor cable is connected to the motor and disconnected from the drive output terminals U, V and W. 2. Measure the insulation resistance between each phase conductor and the Protective Earth conductor using a measuring voltage of 500 V DC. For the insulation resistance of other motors, please consult the manufacturer’s instructions. Note: Moisture inside the motor casing will reduce the insulation resistance. If moisture is suspected, dry the motor and repeat the measurement. D.5 Breaker and electromagnetic contactor It is necessary to add fuse for the avoidance of overload. It is appropriate to use a breaker (MCCB)which complies with the inverter power in the 3-phase AC power and input power and terminals (R,S,T). The capacity of the inverter should be 1.5-2 times of the rated current. 288 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Due to the inherent operating principle and construction of circuit breakers, independent of the manufacturer, hot ionized gases may escape from the breaker enclosure in case of a short-circuit. To ensure safe use, special attention must be paid to the installation and placement of the breakers. Follow the manufacturer’s instructions. It is necessary to install the electromagnetic contactor in the input side to control the switching on and off safety of the main circuit. It can switch off the input power supply when syatem fault. The rated working The inverter Breaker (A) Breaker (A) current of the GD300-1R5G-4 15 16 10 GD300-2R2G-4 17.4 16 10 contactor(A) GD300-004G-4 30 25 16 GD300-5R5G-4 45 25 16 GD300-7R5G-4 60 40 25 GD300-011G-4 78 63 32 GD300-015G-4 105 63 50 GD300-018G-4 114 100 63 GD300-022G-4 138 100 80 GD300-030G-4 186 125 95 GD300-037G-4 228 160 120 GD300-045G-4 270 200 135 GD300-055G-4 315 200 170 GD300-075G-4 420 250 230 GD300-090G-4 480 315 280 GD300-110G-4 630 400 315 GD300-132G-4 720 400 380 GD300-160G-4 870 630 450 GD300-200G-4 1110 630 580 GD300-220G-4 1230 800 630 GD300-250G-4 1380 800 700 GD300-280G-4 1500 1000 780 289 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D The rated working The inverter Breaker (A) Breaker (A) GD300-315G-4 1740 1200 GD300-350G-4 1860 1280 960 GD300-400G-4 2010 1380 1035 GD300-500G-4 2505 1720 1290 current of the contactor(A) 900 D.6 Reactors High current in the input power circuit may cause damage to the rectifying components. It is appropriate to use AC reactor in the input side for the avoidance of high-voltage input of the power supply and improvement of the power factors. If the distance between the inverter and the motor is longer than 50m, frequent overcurrent protection may occur to the inverter because of high leakage current caused by parasitic capacitance effects from the long cables to the ground. In order to avoid the damage of the motor insulation, it is necessary to add reactor compensation. All the inverters above 37kW (including 37kW)are equipped with internal DC reactors for the improvement of power factors and the avoidance of damage from high input current to the rectifying components because of the high-capacity transformer. The device can also cease the damage to the rectifying components which are caused by supply net voltage transients and harmonic waves of the loads. The power of the inverter Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor GD300-1R5G-4 ACL2-1R5-4 / OCL2-1R5-4 GD300-2R2G-4 ACL2-2R2-4 / OCL2-2R2-4 GD300-004G-4 ACL2-004-4 / OCL2-004-4 GD300-5R5G-4 ACL2-5R5-4 / OCL2-5R5-4 290 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D The power of the inverter Input reactor DC reactor Output reactor GD300-7R5G-4 ACL2-7R5-4 / OCL2-7R5-4 GD300-011G-4 ACL2-011-4 / OCL2-011-4 GD300-015G/-4 ACL2-015-4 / OCL2-015-4 GD300-018G-4 ACL2-018-4 / OCL2-018-4 GD300-022G-4 ACL2-022-4 / OCL2-022-4 GD300-030G-4 ACL2-030-4 / OCL2-030-4 GD300-037G-4 ACL2-037-4 DCL2-037-4 OCL2-037-4 GD300-045G-4 ACL2-045-4 DCL2-045-4 OCL2-045-4 GD300-055G-4 ACL2-055-4 DCL2-055-4 OCL2-055-4 GD300-075G-4 ACL2-075-4 DCL2-075-4 OCL2-075-4 GD300-090G-4 ACL2-090-4 DCL2-090-4 OCL2-090-4 GD300-110G-4 ACL2-110-4 DCL2-110-4 OCL2-110-4 GD300-132G-4 ACL2-132-4 DCL2-132-4 OCL2-132-4 GD300-160G-4 ACL2-160-4 DCL2-160-4 OCL2-160-4 GD300-200G-4 ACL2-200-4 DCL2-200-4 OCL2-200-4 GD300-220G-4 ACL2-250-4 DCL2-250-4 OCL2-250-4 GD300-250G-4 ACL2-250-4 DCL2-250-4 OCL2-250-4 GD300-280G-4 ACL2-280-4 DCL2-280-4 OCL2-280-4 GD300-315G-4 ACL2-315-4 DCL2-315-4 OCL2-315-4 GD300-350G-4 Standard DCL2-350-4 OCL2-350-4 GD300-400G-4 Standard DCL2-400-4 OCL2-400-4 GD300-500G-4 Standard DCL2-500-4 OCL2-500-4 Note: 1. The rated derate voltage of the input reactor is 2%±15%. 2. The power factor of the input side is above 90% after adding DC reactor. 3. The rated derate voltage of the output reactor is 1%±15%. 4. Above options are external, the customer should indicate when purchasing. D.7 Filter Goodrive300 series inverters have embedded C3 filters which can be connected by J10. 291 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D The input interference filter can decrease the interference of the inverter to the surrounding equipments. Output interference filter can decrease the radio noise cause by the cables between the inverter and the motor and the leakage current of the conducting wires. Our company configured some filters for the convenient of the users. D.7.1 Filter type instruction Character Detailed instruction designation A B FLT:inverter filter seriee Filter type P:power supply filter Voltage degree C S2:signle phase 220Vac 04:3-phase 380Vac D 3 bit rated current code “015” means 15A Installation type E L: Common type H: High performance type Utilization environment of the filters F A:the first envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C1 (EN envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C2 (EN 61800-3:2004) B:the first 292 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Character Detailed instruction designation 61800-3:2004) C:the second envirtonment (IEC61800-3:2004) category C3 61800-3:2004) D.7.2 Filters selection table Inverter GD300-1R5G-4 Input filter Output filter FLT-P04006L-B FLT-L04006L-B FLT-P04016L-B FLT-L04016L-B FLT-P04032L-B FLT-L04032L-B FLT-P04045L-B FLT-L04045L-B FLT-P04065L-B FLT-L04065L-B FLT-P04100L-B FLT-L04100L-B FLT-P04150L-B FLT-L04150L-B FLT-P04200L-B FLT-L04200L-B FLT-P04250L-B FLT-L04250L-B FLT-P04400L-B FLT-L04400L-B FLT-P04600L-B FLT-L04600L-B FLT-P04800L-B FLT-L04800L-B GD300-2R2G-4 GD300-004G-4 GD300-5R5G-4 GD300-7R5G-4 GD300-011G-4 GD300-015G-4 GD300-018G-4 GD300-022G-4 GD300-030G-4 GD300-037G-4 GD300-045G-4 GD300-055G-4 GD300-075G-4 GD300-090G-4 GD300-110G-4 GD300-132G-4 GD300-160G-4 GD300-200G-4 GD300-220G-4 GD300-250G-4 GD300-280G-4 GD300-315G-4 GD300-350G-4 GD300-400G-4 293 (EN Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D Inverter Input filter Output filter GD300-500G-4 FLT-P041000L-B FLT-L041000L-B Note: 1. The input EMI meet the requirement of C2 after adding input filters. 2. Above options are external, the customer should indicate when purchasing. D.8 Braking system D.8.1 Select the braking components It is appropriate to use braking resistor or braking unit when the motor brakes sharply or the motor is driven by a high inertia load. The motor will become a generator if its actual rotating speed is higher than the corresponding speed of the reference frequency. As a result, the inertial energy of the motor and load return to the inverter to charge the capacitors in the main DC circuit. When the voltage increases to the limit, damage may occur to the inverter. It is necessary to apply braking unit/resistor to avoid this accident happens. Only qualified electricians are allowed to design, install, commission and operate on the inverter. Follow the instructions in “warning” during working. Physical injury or death or serious property may occur. Only qualified electricians are allowed to wire. Damage to the inverter or braking options and part may occur. Read carefully the instructions of braking resistors or units before connecting them with the inverter. Do not connect the braking resistor with other terminals except for PB and (-). Do not connect the braking unit with other terminals except for(+)and(-).Damage to the inverter or braking circuit or fire may occur. Connect the braking resistor or braking unit with the inverter according to the diagram. Incorrect wiring may cause damage to the inverter or other devices. Goodrive300 series inverters below 30kW (including 30kW) need internal braking units and the inverters above 37kW need external braking unit. Please select the resistence and power of the braking resistors according to actual utilization. Type Braking unit type 100% of braking 294 The cousumped power of the braking resistor Mini Braking Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D 10% 50% 80% braking braking braking GD300-1R5G-4 326 0.23 1.1 1.8 170 GD300-2R2G-4 222 0.33 1.7 2.6 130 GD300-004G-4 122 0.6 3 4.8 80 GD300-5R5G-4 89 0.75 4.1 6.6 60 GD300-7R5G-4 Internal braking 65 1.1 5.6 9 47 GD300-011G-4 unit 44 1.7 8.3 13.2 31 GD300-015G-4 32 2 11 18 23 GD300-018G-4 27 3 14 22 19 GD300-022G-4 22 3 17 26 17 GD300-030G-4 16 5 23 36 17 GD300-037G-4 DBU100H-060-4 13 6 28 44 11.7 GD300-045G-4 10 7 34 54 GD300-055G-4 DBU100H-110-4 8 8 41 66 GD300-075G-4 6.5 11 56 90 ID300-090G-4 5.4 14 68 108 GD300-110G-4 4.5 17 83 132 GD300-132G-4 DBU100H-220-4 3.7 20 99 158 GD300-160G-4 3.1 24 120 192 2.5 30 150 240 2.2 33 165 264 GD300-250G-4 2.0 38 188 300 GD300-280G-4 3.6*2 21*2 105*2 168*2 3.2*2 24*2 118*2 189*2 GD300-350G-4 DBU100H-320-4 2.8*2 27*2 132*2 210*2 GD300-400G-4 2.4*2 30*2 150*2 240*2 2*2 38*2 186*2 300*2 DBU100H-160-4 DBU100H-320-4 GD300-200G-4 GD300-220G-4 GD300-315G-4 DBU100H-400-4 Two 6.4 4.4 3.2 2.2 1.8 2.2*2 Two GD300-500G-4 DBU100H-400-4 1.8*2 Note: Select the resistor and power of the braking unit according to the data our company provided. 295 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D The braking resistor may increase the braking torque of the inverter. The resistor power in the above table is designed on 100% braking torque and 10% braking usage ratio. If the users need more braking torque, the braking resistor can decrease properly and the power needs to be magnified. When using the external braking units, please see the instructions of the energy braking units to set the voltage degree of the braking unit. Incorrect voltage degree may affect the normal running of the inverter. Never use a brake resistor with a resistance below the minimum value specified for the particular drive. The drive and the internal chopper are not able to handle the overcurrent caused by the low resistance. Increase the power of the braking resistor properly in the frequent braking situation (the frequency usage ratio is more than 10%). D.8.2 Selecting the brake resistor cables Use a shielded cable to the resistor cable. D.8.3 Placing the brake resistor Install all resistors in a place where they will cool. The materials near the brake resistor must be non-flammable. The surface temperature of the resistor is high. Air flowing from the resistor is of hundreds of degrees Celsius. Protect the resistor against contact. Installation of the braking resistor: The inverters below30kW (including 30kW) only needs external braking resistors. PB and(+)are the wiring terminals of the braking resistors. Installation of braking units: The inverters above 37kW (including 370kW) only needs external braking units. (+),(-) are the wiring terminals of the braking units. 296 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix D The wiring length between the (+),(-) terminals of the inverter and the (+),(-) terminals of the braking units should be no more than 5m,and the distributing length among BR1 and BR2 and the braking resistor terminals should be no more than 10m. Signal installation is as below: 297 Goodrive300 inverters Appendix E Further information Appendix E E.1.1 Product and service inquirie Address any inquiries about the product to your local INVT offices, quoting the type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of INVT sales, support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.invt.com.cn. E.1.2 Providing feedback on INVT Inverters manuals Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.invt.com.cn and select Online Feedback of Contact Us. E.1.3 Document library on the Internet You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go to www.invt.com.cn and select Service and Support of Document Download. 298 C E